NC0024295_Materials and Performance Specifications_20170921

MATERIALS Ann PERFURIDIANCE SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CONNESTEE FALLS WASTEWATER TREATME191
PLANT REPLACEMENT
NPDES PERMIT NCO0224295
Carolina Water Service, Inc. of North Carulina
4944 Parkway Plaza Blvd, Suite 375
Charlotte, Murth Carolina 28217-1983
5eptemder 19, 2017
Land6esign PN 1014381
C0,1 P- 0RA E
- _ Z
• 7• �, 6988
00 C sl C
i. � L�.�� : •�IIHIII IUI►�
i q
Nu Engineering Firm
Eicense: U-0658
LANDDESIGN.COM
223 N GRAHAIW 51REEI CHAHrUl iE MC 28202 - 704 333 0325
LHARLui rE - WASHINGTON DC . DALLAS - ORLANDO - SAN FRANC,ISuu

Division Section Title
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000
SUMMARY
011200
MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
012500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200
REFERENCES
015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015639
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01811333
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - IGCC
019113
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024116 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 05 - METALS
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
061063 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY

Division Section Title
Facility Services Subgroup
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
221113 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
CAROLINA WATER SERVICE OF NC WRITTEN SPECIFICATION - WATER
221313 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
CAROLINA WATER SERVICE OF NC WRITTEN SPECIFICATION FOR WASTEWATER
SYSTEMS
Site and Infrastructure Subgroup
DIVISION 31- EARTHWORK
311000
SITE CLEARING
312000
EARTH MOVING
312319
DEWATERING
315000
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321216 ASPHALT PAVING
321313 CONCRETE PAVING
323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
330500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
Process Equipment Subgroup
DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE
EQUIPMENT
43233105 DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT
460753 PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
46500001 WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - FILTER
46500002 WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - UV DISINFECTION
46500003 VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 011000 -SUMMARY
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Project information.
2.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
3.
Phased construction.
4.
Work under separate contracts.
5.
Access to site.
6.
Coordination with occupants.
7.
Work restrictions.
8.
Specification and Drawing conventions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Connestee Falls WWTP Plant Replacement.
1. Project Location: 5999 Greenville Highway, Brevard, NC 28712.
B. Owner: Gareth B. Beard, Architect, PLLC.
1. Owner's Representative:
Martin Scanlon
704-319-0518
[e-mail]
C. Engineer:
LandDesign Inc.
223 N. Graham Street
Charlotte, NC 28202
704-333-0325.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The intent of these specifications and accompanying plans is to have constructed and placed into
operation the replacement of and modifications to the existing Connestee Falls WWTP ##1 (NPDES
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 011000 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 011000 -SUMMARY
Permit Number NC0024295) as shown on the plans and specified herein, and other Work indicated in
the Contract Documents.
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
The replacement of the existing wastewater treatment plant with a packaged sequencing
batch reactor (SBR) supplied by the Owner. The required tanks and SBR component are
to be installed by the SBR manufacturer on foundations provided by the Contractor.
a. Obtain building/electrical permits as required by Transylvania County.
b. Provide excavation and backfill for installation of all plant components.
C. Construct foundations for all plant equipment.
d. Install all plant appurtenances, controls and electrical as shown on the plans and
specified herein.
2. Furnish, install, and place into service the standby power generator, including unit,
foundation, auto transfer switch, and electrical and controls.
Furnish and install all plant and yard piping, including:
a. On-site water supply system.
b. All drain lines.
C. All force main and pump lines.
d. All piping to and from the SBR and proposed buildings.
e. All air system piping.
f. Yard piping including water and sewer services required for the buildings.
4. Re -locate existing utilities as required to install equipment foundations, drain lines, water
services, and equipment electrical. Coordinate with Owner and on-site operator.
Install the lift station pumps supplied by the Owner at the existing lift station, including
pumps and controls, piping and valves, and electrical.
6. The installation of (2) cloth media filters supplied by the Owner
a. Install, and place into service the cloth media filtration systems in the filter
building including all appurtenances, controls and electrical as shown on the plans
and specified herein.
7. The installation of two (2) ultraviolet disinfection systems supplied by the Owner
a. Install, and place into service the ultraviolet disinfection systems in the filter
building including all appurtenances, controls and electrical as shown on the plans
and specified herein.
b. Furnish, install, and place into service automatic control systems and valves to
switch flow between ultraviolet disinfection units in the event of system failure.
8. The installation of one (1) automatically cleaned fine screen with vertical lifting,
dewatering and compaction of screenings supplied by the Owner
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 011000 Page 2 of 6

SECTION 011000 -SUMMARY
a. Install, and place into service the fine screen system at the existing lift station
building including all appurtenances, controls and electrical as shown on the plans
and specified herein.
b. Furnish, install, and place into service automatic control systems and valves to
switch flow between ultraviolet disinfection units in the event of system failure.
9. The construction of four (4) buildings as described in the Construction Document
a. Provide foundation; construct buildings, including all components, electrical and
controls.
10. Grading
a. As shown on the plans, grade the treatment plant site, including access road.
b. Furnish, place and grade the stone base for the plant site area as shown on the
plans.
C. Furnish and install storm drainage and appurtenances, including rip -rap aprons,
swales, and seeding and stabilization of all cut or fill slopes.
d. Install and maintain additional erosion control measures as necessary during
construction.
e. Dispose of excess earthwork as directed by the Owner near the plant site
11. Erosion Control
a. The construction shall be initiated and shall at all times be in such a manner to
concur with the erosion and sedimentation control requirements of the North
Carolina Administrative Code, Title 15, Chapter 4
12. Demolition of the existing treatment plant after the proposed plant has been placed into
service.
13. The contractor will coordinate all activities with the Owner and on-site operator to ensure
uninterrupted operation of the existing treatment plant.
B. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling,
storing, protecting, and installing Owner -furnished products, and making all required services
connections. The Contractor is to provide all plant components and required appurtenances with
the exception of the equipment listed below that will be supplied by the Owner:
1. (1) packaged sequencing batch reactor treatment plant to be provided by the Owner and
installed on Contractor provided foundations by the plant manufacturer
2. (2) cloth media filter
3. (2) open channel ultra violet disinfection systems
4. (1) Automatically cleaned fine screen with vertical lifting, dewatering and compaction of
screenings.
5. (2) dry -pit submersible sewage pumps.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 011000 Page 3 of 6

SECTION 011000 -SUMMARY
C. Type of Contract:
1. Project will be constructed under coordinated, concurrent multiple contracts. See
Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for a description of work included under
each of the multiple contracts and for the responsibilities of Project coordinator.
Contracts for this Project include the following:
a. Treatment Plant Erection Contract: contract to provide and install sequencing
batch reactor treatment plant equipment including stainless steel tankage.
b. General Contract: Contract to perform Work of the Project listed above, described
in the plans, and specified herein.
C. Commissioning Contract: Contract to perform Commissioning of Equipment and
Buildings
1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION
A. The Work shall be conducted in 6 phases, with each phase substantially complete as indicated.
1. Phase 1: Building 1 and Erosion Control
a. Complete all phase 1 erosion control measures as shown on the plans.
b. Perform rough grading required to construct Building 1 as shown on the plans
C. Building 1 construction, including all components, electrical and controls.
2. Phase 2: Selective Demolition and SBR Foundation
3. Phase 3: Installation of sequencing batch reactor tankage and components by the
manufacturer.
4. Phase 4: All additional Work required to place SBR into service
5. Phase 5: Demolition of existing treatment plant.
6. Phase 6: Final grading, site work, and landscaping
B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction
schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion date, for all phases of the
Work.
1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried
out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract or other contracts.
Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction
operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under
this Contract.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 011000 Page 4 of 6

SECTION 011000 -SUMMARY
Sequencing Batch Reactor Contract: to furnish and install SBR components including
stainless steel tankage on contactor provided foundation.
2. Treatment Plant Contract: to perform the Work of the Contract shown on the plans and
specified herein
=101165311191
A. General: Each Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
I. Limits: Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40
feetbeyond building perimeter; 15 feetbeyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking,
and utilities; and 25 feetbeyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces that require
additional staging areas to limit compaction in the constructed areas.
2. Driveways, Walkways, and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances
serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency
vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials.
C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction
operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by
construction operations.
1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building(s) during entire
construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts
and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day
operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.
1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On -Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7
a.m. to 6 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
Notify Engineer and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 011000 Page 5 of 6

SECTION 011000 -SUMMARY
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within any building or within 25 feetof
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor -air intakes.
E. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site
is not permitted.
1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
I. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon () is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
of all Sections in the Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 011000 Page 6 of 6

SECTION 011200 -MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
SECTION 011200 - MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Work will be performed under the following separate contracts:
1. Treatment Plant Erection Contract:
Contract to provide and install sequencing batch reactor treatment plant equipment
including stainless steel tankage.
2. General Construction Contract:
Contract to perform Work of the Project listed above, described in the plans, and
specified herein.
3. Commissioning Contract:
Contract to perform Commissioning of Equipment and Buildings
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for the Work covered by the Contract Documents,
restrictions on use of Project site, phased construction, coordination with occupants, and
work restrictions.
1.2 PROJECT COORDINATOR
A. Project coordinator shall be responsible for coordination between the General Construction
Contract, Treatment Plant Erection Contract, and the Commissioning Contract.
1.3 PROJECT COORDINATOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Project coordinator shall perform Project coordination activities for the multiple contracts,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Provide typical overall coordination of the Work.
2. Coordinate shared access to workspaces.
3. Coordinate product selections for compatibility.
4. Provide overall coordination of temporary facilities and controls.
5. Coordinate, schedule, and approve interruptions of permanent and temporary utilities,
including those necessary to make connections for temporary services.
6. Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by each
Contract.
7. Prepare coordination drawings in collaboration with each contractor to coordinate work
by more than one contract.
8. Coordinate sequencing and scheduling of the Work.
9. Provide photographic documentation.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 011200 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 011200 -MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
10. Provide quality -assurance and quality -control services specified in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements."
11. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate tests and inspections, and coordinate
schedule of tests and inspections.
12. Provide information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures
affected by construction.
13. Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points, and
establish permanent benchmarks on Project site.
14. Provide field surveys of in -progress construction and site work and final property survey.
15. Provide progress cleaning of common areas and coordinate progress cleaning of areas or
pieces of equipment where more than one contractor has worked.
16. Coordinate cutting and patching.
17. Coordinate protection of the Work.
18. Coordinate firestopping.
19. Coordinate completion of interrelated punch list items.
20. Coordinate preparation of Project Record Documents if information from more than one
contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to form one
combined record.
21. Print and submit Record Documents if installations by more than one contractor are
indicated on the same Contract Drawing or Shop Drawing.
22. Collect record Specification Sections from contractors, collate Sections into numeric
order, and submit complete set.
23. Coordinate preparation of operation and maintenance manuals if information from more
than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to form
one combined record.
B. Responsibilities of Project coordinator for temporary facilities and controls include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Provide common -use field office for use by all personnel engaged in construction
activities.
2. Provide telephone service for common -use facilities.
1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTS
A. Extent of Contract: Unless the Agreement contains a more specific description of the Work of
each Contract, requirements indicated on Drawings and in Specification Sections determine
which contract includes a specific element of Project.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, the work described in this Section for each contract shall be
complete systems and assemblies, including products, components, accessories, and
installation required by the Contract Documents.
2. Trenches and other excavation for the work of each contract shall be the work of the
General Construction Contract.
3. Blocking, backing panels, sleeves, and metal fabrication supports for the work of each
contract shall be the work of each contract for its own work.
4. Equipment pads for the work of each contract shall be the work of the General
Construction Contract.
5. Painting for the work of each contract shall be the work of the General Construction
Contract.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 011200 Page 2 of 4

SECTION 011200 -MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
B. Substitutions: Each contractor shall cooperate with other contractors involved to coordinate
approved substitutions with remainder of the work.
1. Project coordinator The General Construction Contract shall coordinate substitutions.
C. Temporary Facilities and Controls: In addition to specific responsibilities for temporary
facilities and controls indicated in this Section and in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and
Controls," each contractor is responsible for the following:
1. Installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of each temporary facility necessary for
its own normal construction activity, and costs and use charges associated with each
facility, except as otherwise provided for in this Section.
2. Plug-in electric power cords and extension cords, supplementary plug-in task lighting,
and special lighting necessary exclusively for its own activities.
3. Its own storage and fabrication sheds.
4. Temporary enclosures for its own construction activities.
5. Staging and scaffolding for its own construction activities.
6. General hoisting facilities for its own construction activities, up to 2 tons.
7. Waste disposal facilities, including collection and legal disposal of its own hazardous,
dangerous, unsanitary, or other harmful waste materials.
8. Progress cleaning of work areas affected by its operations on a daily basis.
9. Secure lockup of its own tools, materials, and equipment.
10. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities necessary exclusively for its
own construction activities.
D. Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation: The General Construction Contract is
responsible for temporary heating, cooling, and ventilation, including utility -use charges,
temporary meters, and temporary connections.
E. Use Charges: Comply with the following:
1. Electric Power Service: Include the cost for electric power service, whether metered or
otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project
site in the General Construction Contract.
1.5 TREATMENT PLANT ERECTION CONTRACT
A. Work of the Treatment Plant Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Erection of the sequencing batch reactor including the stainless steel tankage and all of
the plant equipment to be installed inside of the tank walls.
A. Work of the General Construction Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Connections to the field erected treatment plant.
2. Installation of all equipment support slabs.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 011200 Page 3 of 4

SECTION 011200 -MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
Installation of all Owner and Manufacturer supplied equipment
4. All remaining work not specifically identified as work under other contracts.
1.7 COMMISSIONING CONTRACT
A. Work of the Commissioning Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Perform Commissioning of Equipment and Buildings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011200
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 011200 Page 4 of 4

SECTION 012500 -SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Requirements:
Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
[�►�7��I►lMM[�]►F.y
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title
and Drawing numbers and titles.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method
cannot be provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 012500 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 012500 -SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and
addresses as well as names and addresses of Engineers and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting
test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from ICC -ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated.
in. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
2. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Engineer's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution
with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.5 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 012500 Page 2 of 4

SECTION 012500 -SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided for compliance with ASHRAE 189.1 requirements.
C. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided for compliance with IgCC requirements.
d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.
C. Substitutions for Convenience: Engineer will consider requests for substitution if received
within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Engineer.
Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
C. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided for compliance with Envision requirements.
e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 012500 Page 3 of 4

SECTION 012500 -SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
J . Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012500
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 012500 Page 4 of 4

SECTION 014000 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality -
assurance and quality -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and quality -control services
required by Engineer, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having
jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further
described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in
nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and
having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Quality -Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of
the Work and for completed Work.
C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.
Use of trade -specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.
E. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to
NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency
qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 014000 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 014000 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
F. Source Quality -Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for
example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
I. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality -control services do not
include contract administration activities performed by Engineer.
1.3 DELEGATED -DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or
requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting
requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent
requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Engineer
for direction before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision
before proceeding.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Delegated -Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance
with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors
used in performing these services.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 014000 Page 2 of 7

SECTION 014000 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction
before starting work on the following systems:
1. Seismic -force -resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
Statement of Special Inspections.
2. Main wind -force -resisting system or a wind -resisting component listed in the Statement
of Special Inspections.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspection.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
2. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 014000 Page 3 of 7

SECTION 014000 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory -Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
manufacturer's factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
2. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
3. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products
from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and
technical or factory -authorized service representative requirements.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or
assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and
extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
H. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 014000 Page 4 of 7

SECTION 014000 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Proj ect.
1.9 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality -control activities, whether specified or
not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.
Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality -control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspection will be performed.
3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service.
4. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer, Commissioning Authority and
Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
inspections.
1. Notify Engineer, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality -control service through Contractor.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 014000 Page 5 of 7

SECTION 014000 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.
E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal
Procedures."
F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing
required tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary
services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment
of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project
site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and
quality -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special
tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner,
and as follows:
1. Notifying Engineer, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities
and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control
service to Engineer and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to
authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
4. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 014000 Page 6 of 7

SECTION 014000 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
5. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Engineer.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and
inspection log for Engineer's, Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal working
hours.
1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.
k ►�_-006T.3173►1.79011 914/110121
A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas
and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in
Section 017300 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality -control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 014000 Page 7 of 7

SECTION 014200 -REFERENCES
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to
dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 014200 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 014200 -REFERENCES
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's
"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'
"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This
information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;
www.iapmo.org.
2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
3. ICC -ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.gM.mil.
2. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
3. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
4. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
1. NCDEQ; North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality
2. NCDOT; North Carolina Department of Transportation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 014200
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 014200 Page 2 of 2

SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
1.2 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in
the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use
temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's
construction forces, Engineer, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging
areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction
personnel.
B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including
plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content.
C. Erosion- and Sedimentation -Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
D. Fire -Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire -prevention
program.
E. Moisture -and Mold -Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials
and construction from water absorption and damage and mold.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015000 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
F. Dust- and HVAC -Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the
dust- and HVAC -control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time
frame for their operation. Include the following:
1. Locations of dust -control partitions at each phase of work.
2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.
3. Location of proposed air -filtration system discharge.
4. Waste -handling procedures.
5. Other dust -control measures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the United States Access
Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating
units is prohibited.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015000 Page 2 of 8

SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
2. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return -air grille
in system and remove at end of construction.
C. Air -Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four -
stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL
A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given
to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to
minimize waste.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that
are designated as Owner's property.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015000 Page 3 of 8

SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
E. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed
construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient and
substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes
and their proper curing or drying.
F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering
occupied areas.
G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feetof building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Engineer schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated on
Drawings.
Provide dust -control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as
required to minimize dust.
C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire -fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015000 Page 4 of 8

SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times.
G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing
facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for
that purpose.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and
requirements specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing."
D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of
stormwater from heavy rains.
E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
F. Pest Control: Engage pest -control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015000 Page 5 of 8

SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using materials approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
G. Site Enclosure Fence:, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent
people from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site and as indicated on Drawings.
H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of
construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and
similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday.
I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and
as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress
and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241; manage fire -prevention program.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking
specified in other Sections.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire -prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire -protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture -Protection Plan: Describe delivery, handling, storage, installation, and
protection provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.
1. Indicate procedures for discarding water -damaged materials, protocols for mitigating
water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water -damaged Work.
2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire -resistive materials,
plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015000 Page 6 of 8

SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to
permit installation of finish materials.
Indicate methods to be used to avoid trapping water in finished work.
B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject
to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Protect porous materials from water damage.
2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
4. Remove standing water from decks.
5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration
of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with
high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
4. Discard or replace water -damaged material.
5. Do not install material that is wet.
6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes.
D. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but
prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry -in conditions.
2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges specified
for installed and stored materials.
3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and
exposure to water limits.
3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015000 Page 7 of 8

SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
I �►1 �I�] �i.Y�f�JI Y [�) �[II[.YIZIII7
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015000 Page 8 of 8

SECTION 015639 -TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by
execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Plant -Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other
vegetation to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings.
B. Tree -Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected
during construction and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the
diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
I. Include plans, elevations, sections, and locations of protection -zone fencing and signage,
showing relation of equipment -movement routes and material storage locations with
protection zones.
C. Samples: For each type of the following:
1. Organic Mulch: Sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage
of weight and source of mulch.
2. Protection -Zone Fencing: Assembled Samples.
3. Protection -Zone Signage: Full-size Samples.
D. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to
remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015639 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 015639 -TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during
construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly
treated and repaired when damaged.
B. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by
construction during and after completing the Work.
C. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which
establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
construction activities.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA, licensed arborist in jurisdiction
where Project is located, current member of ASCA, or registered Consulting Arborist as
designated by ASCA.
liv�� aIa0111011111[6=1
A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2. Moving or parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Foot traffic.
4. Erection of sheds or structures.
5. Impoundment of water.
6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.
C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and
organic mulch.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and
shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Shredded hardwood.
B. Protection -Zone Signage: Shop -fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes
prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015639 Page 2 of 5

SECTION 015639 -TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and
sedimentation -control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from
construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while
mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding,
or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.
B. Tree -Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree -protection zones and other areas indicated. Do
not exceed indicated thickness of mulch.
1. Apply 4 -inch uniform thickness of organic mulch unless otherwise indicated. Do not
place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks.
(cNg�u0110:14111116HIrXely
A. Protection -Zone Fencing: Install protection -zone fencing along edges of protection zones in a
manner that will prevent people from easily entering protected areas except by entrance gates.
1. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without
concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain,
provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Engineer.
2. Access Gates: Install where indicated.
B. Protection -Zone Signage: Install protection -zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a
manner approved by Engineer.
C. Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash.
D. Maintain protection -zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Engineer and
remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the
site.
3.4 ROOT PRUNING
A. Prune tree roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as
follows:
1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning
instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other
equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected
and covered with soil.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015639 Page 3 of 5

SECTION 015639 -TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
3. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
4. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth
Moving."
B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune tree roots by cleanly cutting all roots to the
depth of the required excavation.
C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand or with air spade to the depth
of the required excavation to minimize damage to tree root systems. If excavating by hand, use
narrow -tine spading forks to comb soil to expose roots. Cleanly cut roots as close to excavation
as possible.
3.5 CROWN PRUNING
A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as
directed by arborist.
1. Prune to remove only injured, broken, dying, or dead branches unless otherwise
indicated. Do not prune for shape unless otherwise indicated.
2. Do not remove or reduce living branches to compensate for root loss caused by damaging
or cutting root system.
3. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1).
B. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
C. Do not paint or apply sealants to wounds.
D. Chip removed branches and spread over areas identified by Owner.
3.6 REGRADING
A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
B. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
C. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches or less below elevation of
finish grade, fill with backfill soil. Place backfill soil in a single uncompacted layer and hand
grade to required finish elevations.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant -protection measures in the vicinity of
trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015639 Page 4 of 5

SECTION 015639 -TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
3.8 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be
relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Engineer.
1. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours according to
arborist's written instructions.
2. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status,
as determined by Engineer.
A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash, and debris and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION Ol 5639
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 015639 Page 5 of 5

SECTION 016000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Engineer through
submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-
service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal
or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product
is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of -design product," including make or model
number or other designation. In addition to the basis -of -design product description, product
attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual
characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating
comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable
product. Identify basis -of -design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced.
Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable
Products" Article.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 016000 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 016000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
2. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product
request. Engineer will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable
product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Engineer's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
I . Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 016000 Page 2 of 5

SECTION 016000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide the following:..."
2. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 016000 Page 3 of 5

SECTION 016000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not
be considered.
a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide one of the following:..."
Non -Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, which complies with requirements.
a. Non -limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance
with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:..."
4. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers'
names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not
be considered.
a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following:..."
5. Non -Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available
manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an
unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements.
a. Non -limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to
compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:..."
6. Basis -of -Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.
a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in
Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Engineer's sample,"
provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Engineer's sample. Engineer's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Engineer from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 016000 Page 4 of 5

SECTION 016000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
requirements. Engineer will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Engineer will consider Contractor's
request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following
conditions are not satisfied, Engineer may return requests without action, except to record
noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is
consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is
compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities
of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities
include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties,
weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and
requirements.
2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of Engineers and owners, if requested.
4. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 016000 Page 5 of 5

SECTION 017419 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
B. Related Requirements:
I. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordination of responsibilities for
waste management.
2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
3. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and
removal of above- and below -grade improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials and other solid waste
resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste
includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials resulting from
demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal of demolition or construction waste and subsequent salvage, sale, recycling,
or deposit in landfill, incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or designated
spoil areas on Owner's property.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation
for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation
into the Work.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice of
Award.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017419 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 017419 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit
report. Include the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons.
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.
B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated
end -of -Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated
by the Work.
C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,
receipts, and invoices.
F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and
invoices.
G. Sustainable Design Submittal: Submit documentation to Envision Sustainability Professional
(ENV SP) signed by Contractor, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means
by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements for the credit have been met. Respond
to questions and requests from ENV SP until ENV SP has made its determination on Project's
Envision certification application. Document correspondence with ENV SP as informational
submittals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, or individual employed and
assigned by General Contractor, with a record of successful waste management coordination of
projects with similar requirements.
Firm employs a LEED-Accredited Professional, certified by the USGBC, as waste
management coordinator.
B. If including refrigerant recovery in this Section, retain first "Refrigerant Recovery Technician
Qualifications" Paragraph below and delete second paragraph. Refrigerant Recovery Technician
Qualifications: Type I certified by EPA -approved certification program.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017419 Page 2 of 7

SECTION 017419 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
C. Waste Management Conference(s): Conduct conference(s) at Project site to comply with
requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to requirements in this Section. Plan
shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue
analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight
or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition site -clearing and
construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for
estimates.
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of
each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation
procedures.
1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this
Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the
Work.
2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name,
address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location
where materials separation will be performed.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Achieve end -of -Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total
nonhazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017419 Page 3 of 7

SECTION 017419 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged and recycled.
2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating
elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3. Store items in a secure area until installation.
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and
equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to
make items functional for use indicated.
B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Permitted on Project site.
C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating
elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017419 Page 4 of 7

SECTION 017419 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall accrue to Owner.
C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or
reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each
container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials
if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor as often as required to prevent overfilling bins.
3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt -recycling facility.
B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.
1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1 -1/2 -inch size.
C. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other
metals.
1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 1 -inch size.
2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
D. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber,
engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.
E. Metals: Separate metals by type.
1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017419 Page 5 of 7

SECTION 017419 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
F. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass -fiber asphalt shingles and felts. Remove
and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.
G. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.
H. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry
location.
I. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members, including trim and other metals from
acoustical panels and tile, and sort with other metals.
J. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips.
1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by carpet
reclamation agency or carpet recycler.
K. Carpet Tile: Remove debris, trash, and adhesive.
1. Stack tile on pallet and store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by
carpet reclamation agency or carpet recycler.
L. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by material and size. Separate supports,
hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by material and size.
M. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by material and size.
N. Lamps: Separate lamps by type and store according to requirements in 40 CFR 273.
3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut -Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017419 Page 6 of 7

SECTION 017419 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or
hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
D. Paint: Seal containers and store by type.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged or recycled, remove waste materials from
Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged or recycled, remove waste materials and
legally dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property.
C. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
3.7 TREATMENT PLANT DEMOLITION
A. Treatment plant tanks shall be drained and cleaned in place prior to demolition. Contractor
shall coordinate all activities with the owner and on-site operator. . Water from cleaning
operation shall be directed to the existing drain system to be processed by the proposed
wastewater treatment plant.
B. Special care shall be taken to ensure that debris is not allowed to enter the drain system.
C. The Contractor shall not proceed with demolition until written permission has been obtained
from the Owner
3.8 ATTACHMENTS
END OF SECTION 017419
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017419 Page 7 of 7

SECTION 017700 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements to train the Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products, equipment, and
systems.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017700 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 017700 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number.
5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records.
6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted.
7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in
Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services.
7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleaning requirements.
10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed fmishes to eliminate
visual defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017700 Page 2 of 5

SECTION 017700 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1.5 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Engineer's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Engineer. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection
or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1.6 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including equipment, and
building systems.
1.7 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of
the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial
Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under
warranty.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
Manual.
C. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete
warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
Submit on digital media acceptable to Owner.
D. Warranties in Paper Form:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017700 Page 3 of 5

SECTION 017700 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 -1/2 -by -1l -inch
paper.
E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
17.171IIVN 9:11011181141W
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous
to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
C. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
d. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
e. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
f. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
g. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
h. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
i. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017700 Page 4 of 5

SECTION 017700 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities
and Controls." Prepare written report.
D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
gip► -NQ 7.11xl ej00 111110161IN 114
A. Complete repair and restoration operations, before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
END OF SECTION 017700
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017700 Page 5 of 5

SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Systems and equipment operation manuals.
4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
5. Product maintenance manuals.
vial 1191,11018111i.`lil►a1IIW1, V
A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as
specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of
Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by
this Section.
1. Engineer and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of operation
and maintenance submittals is acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Engineer. Enable reviewer comments on draft
submittals.
2. Submit 2 paper copies. Engineer will return two copies.
C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
Engineer and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Engineer's and Commissioning Authority's
comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of
Engineer's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing
demonstration and training.
D. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017823 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.3 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name
document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual
directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into
individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting
bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated
file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard -copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary
to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve
on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
2. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
1.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate
section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not
part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
I. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
I. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Engineer.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017823 Page 2 of 7

SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Engineer that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
1.5 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017823 Page 3 of 7

SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.6
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS
A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating
operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and
special operating procedures.
B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
C. Descriptions: Include the following:
Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017823 Page 4 of 7

SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for
identification.
I�► IwyJmag i7gel"tou11120IfL Ina 1►YYnm/1►[aaLTJInumna
A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency,
repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.
B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each
component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product
or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component
incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,
identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify
data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not
available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and
maintenance of equipment or systems.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017823 Page 5 of 7

SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
H. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
�.�� ZiI1iL�11yu/.�1►Y11Y�►/:��[y�l�I.�►lil:�:rlc!
A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds, as described below.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017823 Page 6 of 7

SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 017823
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017823 Page 7 of 7

SECTION 017839 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey.
2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit two set(s) of marked -up record prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications,
including addenda and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit duplicate marked -up Product Data as a component of manual.
1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked -up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked -up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017839 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 017839 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
C. Depths of foundations.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
J . Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Engineer's written orders.
1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
in. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked -up record
prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked -up record prints with Engineer. When authorized, prepare a full set
of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Engineer for resolution.
4. Engineer will furnish Contractor with one set of digital data files of the Contract
Drawings for use in recording information.
a. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements
related to use of Engineer's digital data files.
b. Engineer will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate
layers.
C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable
paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017839 Page 2 of 4

SECTION 017839 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files
that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each digital data file.
4. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Engineer.
e. Name of Contractor.
1.4 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.
1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
C. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.
1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and
title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017839 Page 3 of 4

SECTION 017839 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.6 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the
Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for
construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible
condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for
Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 017839
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017839 Page 4 of 4

SECTION 017900 -DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Demonstration and training video recordings.
1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and
outline for each training module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer -produced demonstration and
training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording
of live instructional module.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of
each training module.
1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared
in same paper and PDF file format required for operation and maintenance manuals
specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating
maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for
this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful
learning performance.
B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory -authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017900 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 017900 -DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction
time, and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
have been reviewed and approved by Engineer.
1.6 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a
description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:
Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
C. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Systems and equipment operation manuals.
C. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
d. Product maintenance manuals.
e. Project Record Documents.
f. Identification systems.
g. Warranties and bonds.
h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
C. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017900 Page 2 of 5

SECTION 017900 -DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
C. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
1. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
In. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
C. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
C. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning.
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
C. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017900 Page 3 of 5

SECTION 017900 -DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
1.7 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
1.8 INSTRUCTION
A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,
to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants, instruction times, and location.
B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.
E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's
mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
training use.
1.9 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training
video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and
demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.
1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective
and lesson outline.
B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by
a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in
full HD mode.
1. Submit video recordings on CD-ROM or thumb drive.
C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to
adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017900 Page 4 of 5

SECTION 017900 -DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment
markings are clearly visible prior to recording.
E. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training
modules in same format as recordings of live training.
17.11 4114 910111814M
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 017900
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 017900 Page 5 of 5

SECTION 01811333 -SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - ENVISION
SECTION 0 18113.3 3 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - ENVISION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain Envision
rating system for sustainable infrastructure requirements.
1. Other Envision requirements depend on product selections and may not be specifically
identified as Envision requirements. Compliance with Envision requirements will be used
as one criterion to evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Envision: A rating system for sustainable infrastructure.
1. Definitions that are a part of the Envision rating system apply to this Section.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Respond to questions and requests from Architect regarding Envision requirements that are the
responsibility of the Contractor, that depend on product selection or product qualities, or that
depend on Contractor's procedures. Document responses as informational submittals.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Envision Documentation Submittals:
1. Material Selection: Product data for used, recycled, recyclable, bio -based, and indigenous
materials showing compliance with requirements. Tabulate mass, volume, or cost for
building materials used in the Project and indicate those that are used, recycled,
recyclable, bio -based, or indigenous. Include summary of building materials tabulation,
showing compliance with requirement and the following:
a. Receipts for used materials, indicating sources and mass, volume, or cost as
applicable.
b. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers for recyclable
materials. Include statement indicating mass, volume, or cost as applicable.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 01811333 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 01811333 -SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - ENVISION
C. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers indicating
percentage by weight of recycled content for products having recycled content.
Include statement indicating mass, volume, or cost as applicable.
d. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers for bio -based
materials. Include chain -of -custody certificates for products containing certified
wood. Include statement indicating mass, volume, or cost as applicable.
e. Product data for indigenous materials indicating location of material manufacturer
and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for raw materials. Include statement
indicating distances from Project site, modes of transportation, and mass, volume,
or cost as applicable.
2. Indoor -Air Quality (IAQ) During Construction:
a. Construction IAQ management plan.
b. Product data for temporary filtration media.
C. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy.
3. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control: Product data for the following, indicating
compliance with requirements.
a. Composite wood products.
b. Adhesives and sealants.
C. Paints and coatings.
d. Flooring.
e. Acoustical ceilings and wall systems.
f. Insulation.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Action Plans: Submit the following action plans within 14 days of date established for the
Notice of Award, indicating how requirements will be met.
1. Material Selection Plan: List of proposed materials. Tabulate anticipated mass, volume,
or cost for proposed building materials and indicate those that are used, recycled,
recyclable, bio -based, or indigenous. Include summary of proposed building materials
tabulation, showing compliance with requirement.
2. Construction IAQ management plan.
B. Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports comparing
actual construction activities with action plans.
C. IAQ test report.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 01811333 Page 2 of 7

SECTION 01811333 -SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - ENVISION
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Provide products and procedures necessary to comply with requirements in this Section for
material selection and for material emissions and pollutant control. Although other Sections
may specify some requirements for material selection and for material emissions and pollutant
control, the Contractor shall provide additional materials and procedures necessary to comply
with requirements.
2.2 MATERIAL SELECTION
A. Provide not less than 55 percent of construction materials that comply with one of the
following, excluding electrical, mechanical, plumbing, security, fire detection, fire alarm,
controls, fire suppression, and elevators.
1. Used materials and components.
2. Recycled content building materials.
3. Recyclable building materials and building components.
4. Bio -based materials.
5. Indigenous materials.
2.3 MATERIAL EMISSIONS AND POLLUTANT CONTROL
A. Composite wood products shall have formaldehyde emission rates not greater than the
following when tested according to ASTM D 6007 or ASTM E 1333.
1. Hardwood Plywood: 0.05 ppm.
2. Particleboard: 0.09 ppm.
3. Medium -Density Fiberboard More Than 5/16 Inch Thick: 0.11 ppm.
4. Medium -Density Fiberboard 5/16 Inch or Less in Thickness: 0.13 ppm.
B. Adhesives and Sealants: Not less than 85 percent of field -applied adhesives and sealants that are
inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with either of first two subparagraphs below:
1. VOC emissions shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of
Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever
is less.
2. VOC content shall not exceed limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following:
a. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
C. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
d. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
e. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
£ Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 01811333 Page 3 of 7

SECTION 01811333 -SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - ENVISION
g. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
h. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
i. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
j. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
k. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
1. Single -Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L.
in. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
n. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
o. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
p. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
q. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.
r. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.
S. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
t. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.
U. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.
V. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.
W. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
X. Special -Purpose Contact Adhesives (Contact Adhesives That Are Used to Bond
Melamine -Covered Board, Metal, Unsupported Vinyl, Rubber, or Wood Veneer
1/16 Inch or Less in Thickness to Any Surface): 250 g/L.
y. Structural Wood Member Adhesives: 140 g/L.
C. Paints and Coatings: Not less than 85 percent of field -applied paints and coatings that are inside
the weatherproofing system shall comply with either of the following:
1. VOC emissions shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of
Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. in or 13.5 ppb, whichever
is less.
2. VOC content shall not exceed limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following:
a. Flat Coatings: 50 g/L.
b. Nonflat Coatings: 100 g/L.
C. Nonflat - High Gloss Coatings: 150 g/L.
d. Basement Special Coatings: 400 g/L.
e. Bond Breakers: 350 g/L.
f. Concrete Curing Compounds: 350 g/L.
g. Concrete/Masonry Sealers: 100 g/L.
h. Dry -Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.
i.Faux Finishing Coatings: 350 g/L.
i. Fire -Resistive Coatings: 350 g/L.
k. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
1. Form -Release Compounds: 250 g/L.
M. Graphic Arts Coatings (Sign Paints): 500 g/L.
n. High -Temperature Coatings: 420 g/L.
o. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 250 g/L.
P. Low Solids Coatings: 120 g/L.
q. Magnesite Cement Coatings: 450 g/L.
r. Mastic Texture Coatings: 100 g/L.
S. Metallic Pigmented Coatings: 500 g/L.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 01811333 Page 4 of 7

SECTION 01811333 -SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - ENVISION
t. Multi -Color Coatings: 250 g/L.
U. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
V. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.
W. Reactive Penetrating Sealers: 350 g/L.
X. Recycled Coatings: 250 g/L.
y. Rust -Preventive Coatings: 250 g/L.
Z. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
aa. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
bb. Stains: 250 g/L.
cc. Swimming Pool Coatings: 340 g/L.
dd. Tub and Tile Refinish Coatings: 420 g/L.
ee. Waterproof Membranes: 250 g/L.
ff. Wood Coatings: 275 g/L.
gg. Wood Preservatives: 350 g/L.
hh. Zinc -Rich Primers: 340 g/L.
D. Flooring: All] flooring materials shall comply with the requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. in or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less.
Where postmanufactured coatings or applications have not been applied, concrete; ceramic and
concrete tile; clay and concrete pavers; metal; and organic -free, mineral -based flooring shall be
deemed to comply with this requirement.
E. Acoustical Ceilings: All acoustic ceilings shall comply with the requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. in or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less.
F. Wall Systems: All wall systems shall comply with the requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. in or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less.
Where postmanufactured coatings or applications have not been applied, concrete, concrete
masonry, clay masonry, gypsum plaster, ceramic and concrete tile, metal, and organic -free,
mineral -based materials shall be deemed to comply with this requirement.
G. Insulation: 85 percent of insulation shall comply with the requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. in or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less,
except for insulation manufactured without formaldehyde.
H. Total VOC Limit: Not less than 50 percent of adhesives, sealants, paints, coatings, flooring,
acoustical ceilings, wall systems, and insulation shall have a total VOC emission rate of not
more than 500 micrograms/cu. m when determined according to the California Department of
Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 01811333 Page 5 of 7

SECTION 01811333 -SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - ENVISION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT
A. Cover or close openings in ducts and other related air -distribution component openings with
tape, plastic, sheet metal, or other approved method before beginning dust -producing operations
and maintain until dust -producing operations are complete.
B. Provide temporary ventilation during construction, using one or more of the following methods:
1. Natural ventilation complying with the IBC.
2. Fans that produce three air changes per hour.
3. Exhaust in work areas at not less than 0.05 cfm/sq. ft. and not less than 10 percent greater
than supply air to maintain a negative pressure.
C. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during
construction period, as specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls," install
MERV 8 filter media according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return -air inlet for the air -handling
system used during construction.
Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.
D. Air -Quality Testing: Engage testing agency to perform the following for the Office Building:
1. Conduct baseline IAQ testing, after construction ends and prior to occupancy, using
testing protocols in accordance with ASTM D 5197, ASTM D 5466, ASTM D 6196,
ASTM D 6345, and ISO 7708. The number of sampling points shall not be less than one
per 25,000 sq. ft. or for each contiguous floor area.
2. Concentrations of the following shall not exceed:
a. Particulates (PM2.5): 35 micrograms/cu. m. (24 h)
b. Particulates (PM10): 150 micrograms/cu. m. (24 h)
C. Carbon Monoxide: 9 ppm and no greater than 2 ppm above outdoor levels.
d. 1, 1, 1 -Trichloroethane: 1000 micrograms/cu. m.
e. 1, 3 -Butadiene: 20 micrograms/cu. m.
f. 1, 4 -Dichlorobenzene: 800 micrograms/cu. m.
g. 1, 4 -Dioxane: 3000 micrograms/cu. m.
h. 2 -Propanol: 7000 micrograms/cu. m.
i. Acetaldhyde: 140 micrograms/cu. m.
j. Acrylonitrile: 5 micrograms/cu. m.
k. Benzene: 60 micrograms/cu. m.
1. t -Butyl Methyl Ether: 8000 micrograms/cu. m.
M. Carbon Disulfide: 800 micrograms/cu. m.
n. Carbon Tetrachloride: 40 micrograms/cu. m.
o. Chlorobenzene: 1000 micrograms/cu. m.
p. Chloroform: 300 micrograms/cu. m.
q. Dichloromethene: 400 micrograms/cu. m.
r. Ethybenzene: 2000 micrograms/cu. m.
S. Ethylene Glycol: 400 micrograms/cu. m.
t. Formaldehyde: 27 micrograms/cu. m.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 01811333 Page 6 of 7

SECTION 01811333 -SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - ENVISION
U. n -Hexane: 7000 micrograms/cu. in.
V. Naphthalene: 9 micrograms/cu. in.
W. Phenol: 200 micrograms/cu. in.
X. Styrene: 900 micrograms/cu. in.
y. Tetrachloroethane: 35 micrograms/cu. in.
Z. Toluene: 300 micrograms/cu. in.
aa. Trichloroethane: 600 micrograms/cu. in.
bb. Xylene Isomers: 700 micrograms/cu. in.
cc. Total Volatile Organic Compounds: 500 micrograms/cu. in.
Where carpets and fabrics with styrene butadiene rubber latex backing are installed,
concentrations of the following shall not exceed:
a. 1-Methyl-2-Pyrrolidinone: 160 micrograms/cu. in.
b. 2-Ethylhexanoic Acid: 25 micrograms/cu. in.
C. 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4 -PH): 2.5 micrograms/cu. in.
d. Caprolactam: 100 micrograms/cu. in.
e. Nonanal: 13 micrograms/cu. in.
f. Octanal: 7.2 micrograms/cu. in.
4. For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are exceeded, conduct
additional flush -out with outside air and retest the specific parameter(s) exceeded to
indicate the requirements are achieved. Repeat procedure until all requirements have been
met. When retesting noncomplying building areas, take samples from same locations as
in the first test.
END OF SECTION 018113.33
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 01811333 Page 7 of 7

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General requirements for coordinating and scheduling commissioning.
2. Commissioning meetings.
3. Commissioning reports.
4. Use of test equipment, instrumentation, and tools for commissioning.
5. Construction checklists, including, but not limited to, installation checks, startup,
performance tests, and performance test demonstration.
6. Commissioning tests and commissioning test demonstration.
7. Adjusting, verifying, and documenting identified systems and assemblies.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submittal procedures requirements for
commissioning.
2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for certificate of Construction Phase
Commissioning Completion submittal requirements.
3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for preliminary operation and
maintenance data submittal.
4. Section 260800 "Commissioning of Electrical Systems" for technical commissioning
requirements for electrical systems.
5. Section 270800 "Commissioning of Communications" for technical commissioning
requirements for communications systems.
6. Section 280800 "Commissioning of Electronic Safety and Security" for technical
commissioning requirements for electronic safety and security systems.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Acceptance Criteria: Threshold of acceptable work quality or performance specified for a
commissioning activity, including, but not limited to, construction checklists, performance tests,
performance test demonstrations, commissioning tests and commissioning test demonstrations.
B. Basis -of -Design Document: A document prepared by Owner, Engineer, or Commissioning
Authority that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections used to comply
with Owner's Project Requirements and to suit applicable regulatory requirements, standards,
and guidelines.
C. Commissioning Authority: An entity engaged by Owner, and identified in Section 011000
"Summary," to evaluate Commissioning -Process Work.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 1 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
D. Commissioning Plan: A document, prepared by Commissioning Authority, that outlines the
organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of
commissioning.
E. Commissioning: A quality -focused process for verifying and documenting that the facility and
all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, and tested to comply with
Owner's Project Requirements. The requirements specified here are limited to the construction
phase commissioning activities. The scope of commissioning is defined in Section 011000
"Summary."
F. Construction Phase Commissioning Completion: The stage of completion and acceptance of
commissioning when resolution of deficient conditions and issues discovered during
commissioning and retesting until acceptable results are obtained has been accomplished.
Owner will establish in writing the date Construction Phase Commissioning Completion is
achieved. See Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for certificate of Construction Phase
Commissioning Completion submittal requirements.
Commissioning is complete when the work specified in this Section and related Sections
has been completed and accepted, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Completion of tests and acceptance of test results.
b. Resolution of issues, as verified by retests performed and documented with
acceptance of retest results.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
d. Completion and acceptance of submittals and reports.
G. Owner's Project Requirements: A document written by Owner, Engineer, or Commissioning
Authority that details the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of how it
will be used and operated, including Project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost
considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting information.
H. Owner's Witness: Commissioning Authority, Owner's Project Manager, or Engineer -designated
witness authorized to authenticate test demonstration data and to sign completed test data forms.
I. "Systems," "Assemblies," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms
are used together or separately, they shall mean "as -built" systems, assemblies, subsystems,
equipment, and components.
Test: Performance tests, performance test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and
commissioning test demonstrations.
K. Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Attributes: As defined in ASQ ZI A.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submittal procedures
general requirements for commissioning.
B. Commissioning Plan Information:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 2 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
1. List of Contractor -appointed commissioning team members to include specific personnel
and subcontractors to the performance of the various commissioning requirements.
2. Schedule of commissioning activities, integrated with the construction schedule. Comply
with requirements in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for
construction schedule general requirements for commissioning.
3. Contractor personnel and subcontractors to participate in each test.
4. List of instrumentation required for each test to include identification of parties that will
provide instrumentation for each test.
C. Commissioning schedule.
D. Two-week look -ahead schedules.
E. Test Reports:
1. Pre -Startup Report: Prior to start up of equipment or a system, submit signed, completed
construction checklists.
2. Test Data Reports: At the end of each day in which tests are conducted, submit test data
for tests performed.
3. Commissioning Issues Reports: Daily, at the end of each day in which tests are
conducted, submit commissioning issue reports for tests for which acceptable results
were not achieved.
4. Weekly Progress Report: Weekly, at the end of each week in which tests are conducted,
submit a progress report.
5. Data Trend Logs: Submit data trend logs at the end of the trend log period.
6. System Alarm Logs: Daily, at the start of days following a day in which tests were
performed, submit print-out of log of alarms that occurred since the last log was printed.
F. Construction Checklists:
1. Material checks.
2. Installation checks.
3. Startup procedures, where required.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Commissioning Report:
At Construction Phase Commissioning Completion, include the following:
a. Pre -startup reports.
b. Approved test procedures
C. Test data forms, completed and signed.
d. Progress reports.
e. Commissioning issues report log.
f. Commissioning issues reports showing resolution of issues.
g. Correspondence or other documents related to resolution of issues.
h. Other reports required by commissioning.
i. List unresolved issues and reasons they remain unresolved and should be exempted
from the requirements for Construction Phase Commissioning Completion.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 3 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
j. Report shall include commissioning work of Contractor.
B. Request for Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Commissioning Authority Responsibilities: Comply with requirements in Section 011000
"Summary."
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT, INSTRUMENTATION, AND TOOLS
A. Test equipment and instrumentation required to perform the commissioning shall remain the
property of Contractor unless otherwise indicated.
B. Test equipment and instrumentation required to perform commissioning shall comply with the
following criteria:
1. Be manufactured for the purpose of testing and measuring tests for which they are being
used and have an accuracy to test and measure system performance within the tolerances
required to determine acceptable performance.
2. Calibrated and certified.
a. Calibration performed and documented by a qualified calibration agency according
to national standards applicable to the tools and instrumentation being calibrated.
Calibration shall be current according to national standards or within test
equipment and instrumentation manufacturer's recommended intervals, whichever
is more frequent, but not less than within six months of initial use on Project.
Calibration tags permanently affixed.
b. Repair and recalibrate test equipment and instrumentation if dismantled, dropped,
or damaged since last calibrated.
3. Maintain test equipment and instrumentation.
4. Use test equipment and instrumentation only for testing or monitoring Work for which
they are designed.
2.2 PROPRIETARY TEST EQUIPMENT, INSTRUMENTATION, AND TOOLS
A. Proprietary test equipment, instrumentation, and tools are those manufactured or prescribed by
tested equipment manufacturer and required for work on its equipment as a condition of
equipment warranty, or as otherwise required to service, repair, adjust, calibrate or perform
work on its equipment.
1. Identify proprietary test equipment, instrumentation, and tools required in the test
equipment identification list submittal.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 4 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
2. Proprietary test equipment, instrumentation, and tools shall become the property of
Owner at Substantial Completion.
2.3 REPORT FORMAT AND ORGANIZATION
A. General Format and Organization:
1. Bind report in three-ring binders.
2. Label the front cover and spine of each binder with the report title, volume number,
project name, Contractor's name, and date of report.
3. Record report on compact disk.
4. Electronic Data: Portable document format (PDF); a single file with outline -organized
bookmarks for major and minor tabs and tab contents itemized for specific reports.
B. Commissioning Report:
1. Include a table of contents and an index to each test.
2. Include major tabs for each Specification Section.
3. Include minor tabs for each test.
4. Within each minor tab, include the following:
a. Test specification.
b. Pre -startup reports.
C. Approved test procedures.
d. Test data forms, completed and signed.
e. Commissioning issue reports, showing resolution of issues, and documentation
related to resolution of issues pertaining to a single test. Group data forms,
commissioning issue reports showing resolution of issues, and documentation
related to resolution of issues for each test repetition together within the minor tab,
in reverse chronological order (most recent on top).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Review preliminary construction checklists and preliminary test procedures and data forms.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS
A. Construction checklists cannot modify or conflict with the Contract Documents.
B. Create construction checklists based on actual systems and equipment to be included in Project.
C. Material Checks: Compare specified characteristics and approved submittals with materials as
received. Include factory tests and other evaluations, adjustments, and tests performed prior to
shipment, if applicable.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 5 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
I. Services connection requirements, including configuration, size, location, and other
pertinent characteristics.
2. Included optional features.
3. Delivery Receipt Check: Inspect and record physical condition of materials and
equipment on delivery to Project site, including agreement with approved submittals,
cleanliness and lack of damage.
4. Installation Checks:
a. Location according to Drawings and approved Shop Drawings.
b. Configuration.
C. Compliance with manufacturers' written installation instructions.
d. Attachment to structure.
e. Access clearance to allow for maintenance, service, repair, removal, and
replacement without the need to disassemble or remove other equipment or
building elements. Access coordinated with other building elements and
equipment, including, but not limited to, ceiling and wall access panels, in a
manner consistent with OSHA fall -protection regulations and safe work practices.
£ Utility connections are of the correct characteristics, as applicable.
g. Correct labeling and identification.
h. Startup Checks: Verify readiness of equipment to be energized. Include
manufacturer's standard startup procedures and forms.
D. Startup: Perform and document initial operation of equipment to prove that it is installed
properly and operates as intended according to manufacturer's standard startup procedures,
minimum.
E. Performance Tests:
1. Static Tests: As specified elsewhere, including, but not limited to, duct and pipe leakage
tests, insulation -resistance tests, and water -penetration tests.
2. Component Performance Tests: Tests evaluate the performance of an input or output of
components under a full range of operating conditions.
3. Equipment and Assembly Performance Tests: Test and evaluate performance of
equipment and assemblies under a full range of operating conditions and loads.
4. System Performance Tests: Test and evaluate performance of systems under a full range
of operating conditions and loads.
5. Intersystem Performance Tests: Test and evaluate the interface of different systems under
a full range of operating conditions and loads.
F. Deferred Construction Checklists: Obtain Owner approval of proposed deferral of construction
checklists, including proposed schedule of completion of each deferred construction checklist,
before submitting request for Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion.
When approved, deferred construction checklists may be completed after date of Construction
Phase Commissioning Completion. Include the following in request for Certificate of
Construction Phase Commissioning Completion:
1. Identify deferred construction checklists by number and title.
2. Provide a target schedule for completion of deferred construction checklists.
3. Written approval of proposed deferred construction checklists, including approved
schedule of completion of each deferred construction checklist.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 6 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
G. Delayed Construction Checklists: Obtain Owner approval of proposed delayed construction
checklists, including proposed schedule of completion of each delayed construction checklist,
before submitting request for Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion.
When approved, delayed construction checklists may be completed after date of Construction
Phase Commissioning Completion. Include the following in request for Certificate of
Construction Phase Commissioning Completion:
1. Identify delayed construction checklist by construction checklist number and title.
2. Provide a target schedule for completion of delayed construction checklists.
3. Written approval of proposed delayed construction checklists, including approved
schedule of completion of each delayed construction checklist.
3.3 GENERAL EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Schedule and coordinate commissioning with the construction schedule.
B. Perform activities identified in construction checklists, including tests, and document results of
actions as construction proceeds.
C. Perform test demonstrations for Owner's witness. Unless otherwise indicated, demonstrate tests
for 100 percent of work to which the test applies. In some instances, demonstration of a random
sample of other than 100 percent of the results of a test is specified.
Where sampling is specified, the sampling plan and procedure for the test demonstration
shall be determined using ASQ ZI A.
a. General Inspection: Level I.
b. Special Inspection: Level S-1.
C. Acceptance Quality Limit (AQL) of 1.5.
2. The "lot size" in ASQ ZIA is the sum of the number of items to which the test
demonstration applies, as described in the scope subparagraph of each test.
3. On determination of the sample size, the samples shall be selected randomly by Owner's
witness at the time of the test demonstration.
4. Include in the Commissioning Plan a detailed list of the test demonstrations with lot and
sample quantities for each test.
D. Report test data and commissioning issue resolutions.
E. Schedule personnel to participate in and perform Commissioning -Process Work.
F. Installing contractors' commissioning responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Operating the equipment and systems they install during tests.
2. In addition, installing contractors may be required to assist in tests of equipment and
systems with which their work interfaces.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 7 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
3.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Management and Coordination: Manage, schedule, and coordinate commissioning, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordinate with subcontractors on their commissioning responsibilities and activities.
2. Obtain, assemble, and submit commissioning documentation.
3. Attend periodic on-site commissioning meetings.
4. Develop and maintain the commissioning schedule. Integrate commissioning schedule
into the construction schedule. Update schedule at specified intervals.
5. Review and comment on preliminary test procedures and data farms.
6. Report inconsistencies and issues in system operations.
7. Verify that tests have been completed and results comply with acceptance criteria, and
that equipment and systems are ready before scheduling test demonstrations.
8. Direct and coordinate test demonstrations.
9. Coordinate witnessing of test demonstrations by Owner's witness.
10. Coordinate and manage training. Be present during training sessions to direct video
recording, present training and direct the training presentations of others. Comply with
requirements in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
11. Prepare and submit specified commissioning reports.
12. Track commissioning issues until resolution and retesting is successfully completed.
13. Retain original records of Commissioning -Process Work, organized as required for the
commissioning report. Provide access by Owner to these records on request.
14. Assemble and submit commissioning report.
3.5 COMMISSIONING TESTING
A. Quality Control: Construction checklists, including tests, are quality -control tools designed to
improve the functional quality of Project. Test demonstrations evaluate the effectiveness of
Contractor's quality -control process.
B. Owner's witness will be present to witness commissioning work requiring the signature of an
owner's witness, including, but not limited to, test demonstrations. Owner's project manager will
coordinate attendance by Owner's witness with Contractor's published commissioning schedule.
Owner's witness will provide no labor or materials in the commissioning work. The only
function of Owner's witness will be to observe and comment on the progress and results of
commissioning.
C. Construction Checklists:
1. Complete construction checklists as Work is completed.
2. Distribute construction checklists to installing contractors before they start work.
3. Installers:
a. Verify installation using approved construction checklists as Work proceeds.
b. Complete and sign construction checklists weekly for work performed during the
preceding week.
4. Provide Commissioning Authority access to construction checklists.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 8 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
D. Installation Compliance Issues: Record as an installation compliance issue Work found to be
incomplete, inaccessible, at variance with the Contract Documents, nonfunctional, or that does
not comply with construction checklists. Record installation compliance issues on the
construction checklist at the time they are identified. Record corrective action and how future
Work should be modified before signing off the construction checklist.
E. Pre -Startup Audit: Prior to executing startup procedures, review completed installation checks
to determine readiness for startup and operation. Report conditions, which, if left uncorrected,
adversely impact the ability of systems or equipment to operate satisfactorily or to comply with
acceptance criteria. Prepare pre -startup report for each system.
F. Test Procedures and Test Data Forms:
1. Test procedures shall define the step-by-step procedures to be used to execute tests and
test demonstrations.
2. Test procedures shall be specific to the make, model, and application of the equipment
and systems being tested.
3. Completed test data forms are the official records of the results of tests.
4. Commissioning Authority will provide to Contractor preliminary test procedures and test
data forms for performance tests and commissioning tests after approval of Product Data,
Shop Drawings, and preliminary operation and maintenance manual.
5. Review preliminary test procedures and test data forms and provide comments within 14
days of receipt from Commissioning Authority. Review shall address the following:
a. Equipment protection and warranty issues, including, but not limited to,
manufacturers' installation and startup recommendations, and operation and
maintenance instructions.
b. Applicability of the procedure to the specific software, equipment, and systems
approved for installation.
6. After Contractor has reviewed and commented on the preliminary test procedures and test
data forms, Commissioning Authority will revise and reissue the approved revised test
procedures and test data forms marked "Approved for Testing."
7. Use only approved test procedures and test data forms marked "Approved for Testing" to
perform and document tests and test demonstrations.
G. Performance of Tests:
1. The sampling rate for tests is 100 percent. The sampling rate for test demonstrations is
100 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2. Perform and complete each step of the approved test procedures in the order listed.
3. Record data observed during performance of tests on approved data forms at the time of
test performance and when the results are observed.
4. Record test results that are not within the range of acceptable results on commissioning
issue report forms in addition to recording the results on approved test procedures and
data forms according to the "Commissioning Compliance Issues" Paragraph in this
Article.
5. On completion of a test, sign the completed test procedure and data form. Tests for which
test procedures and data forms are incomplete, not signed, or which indicate performance
that does not comply with acceptance criteria will be rejected. Tests for which test
procedures and data forms are rejected shall be repeated and results resubmitted.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 9 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
H. Performance of Test Demonstration:
1. Perform test demonstrations on a sample of tests after test data submittals are approved.
The sampling rate for test demonstrations shall be 100 percent unless otherwise indicated
in the individual test specification.
2. Notify Owner's witness at least three days in advance of each test demonstration.
3. Perform and complete each step of the approved test procedures in the order listed.
4. Record data observed during performance of test demonstrations on approved data forms
at the time of demonstration and when the results are observed.
5. Provide full access to Owner's witness to directly observe the performance of all aspects
of system response during the test demonstration. On completion of a test demonstration,
sign the completed data form and obtain signature of Owner's witness at the time of the
test to authenticate the reported results.
6. Test demonstration data forms not signed by Contractor and Owner's witness at the time
of the completion of the procedure will be rejected. Test demonstrations for which data
forms are rejected shall be repeated and results shall be resubmitted.
a. Exception for Failure of Owner's Witness to Attend: Failure of Owner's witness to
be present for agreed -on schedule of test demonstration shall not delay Contractor.
If Owner's witness fails to attend a scheduled test, Contractor shall proceed with
the scheduled test. On completion, Contractor shall sign the data form for
Contractor and for Owner's witness, and shall note the absence of Owner's witness
at the scheduled time and place.
7. False load test requirements are specified in related sections.
a. Where false load testing is specified, provide temporary equipment, power,
controls, wiring, piping, valves, and other necessary equipment and connections
required to apply the specified load to the system. False load system shall be
capable of steady-state operation and modulation at the level of load specified.
Equipment and systems permanently installed in this work shall not be used to
create the false load without Engineer's written approval.
I. Deferred Tests:
Deferred Tests List: Identify, in the request for Certificate of Construction Phase
Commissioning Completion, proposed deferred tests or other tests approved for deferral
until specified seasonal or other conditions are available. When approved, deferred tests
may be completed after the date of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion.
Identify proposed deferred tests in the request for Certificate of Construction Phase
Commissioning Completion as follows:
a. Identify deferred tests by number and title.
b. Provide a target schedule for completion of deferred tests.
2. Schedule and coordinate deferred tests. Schedule deferred tests when specified conditions
are available. Notify Engineer and Commissioning Authority at least three working days
(minimum) in advance of tests.
3. Where deferred tests are specified, coordinate participation of necessary personnel and of
Engineer, Commissioning Authority, and Owner's witness. Schedule deferred tests to
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 10 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
minimize occupant and facility impact. Obtain Engineer's approval of the proposed
schedule.
Delayed Tests:
Delayed Tests List: Identify, in the request for Certificate of Construction Phase
Commissioning Completion, proposed delayed tests. Obtain Owner approval of proposed
delayed tests, including proposed schedule of completion of each delayed test, before
submitting request for Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion.
Include the following in the request for Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning
Completion:
a. Identify delayed tests by test number and title.
b. Written approval of proposed delayed tests, including approved schedule of
completion of delayed tests.
2. Schedule and coordinate delayed tests. Schedule delayed tests when conditions that
caused the delay have been rectified. Notify Engineer and Commissioning Authority at
least three working days (minimum) in advance of tests.
3. Where delayed tests are approved, coordinate participation of necessary personnel and of
Engineer, Commissioning Authority, and Owner's witness. Schedule delayed tests to
minimize occupant and facility impact. Obtain Engineer's approval of the proposed
schedule.
K. Commissioning Compliance Issues:
1. Test results that are not within the range of acceptable results are commissioning
compliance issues.
2. Track and report commissioning compliance issues until resolution and retesting are
successfully completed.
3. If a test demonstration fails, determine the cause of failure. Direct timely resolution of
issue and then repeat the demonstration. If a test demonstration must be repeated due to
failure caused by Contractor work or materials, reimburse Owner for billed costs for the
participation in the repeated demonstration.
4. Test Results: If a test demonstration fails to meet the acceptance criteria, perform the
following:
a. Complete a commissioning compliance issue report form promptly on discovery of
test results that do not comply with acceptance criteria.
b. Submit commissioning compliance issue report form within 24 hours of the test.
C. Determine the cause of the failure.
d. Establish responsibility for corrective action if the failure is due to conditions
found to be Contractor's responsibility.
5. Commissioning Compliance Issue Report: Provide a commissioning compliance issue
report for each issue. Do not report multiple issues on the same commissioning
compliance issue report.
a. Exception: If an entire class of devices is determined to exhibit the identical issue,
they may be reported on a single commissioning compliance issue report. (For
example, if all return -air damper actuators that are specified to fail to the open
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 11 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
position are found to fail to the closed position, they may be reported on a single
commissioning issue report. If a single commissioning issue report is used for
multiple commissioning compliance issues, each device shall be identified in the
report, and the total number of devices at issue shall be identified.
b. Complete and submit Part 1 of the commissioning compliance issue report
immediately when the condition is observed.
C. Record the commissioning compliance issue report number and describe the
deficient condition on the data form.
d. Resolve commissioning compliance issues promptly. Complete and submit Part 2
of the commissioning compliance issue report when issues are resolved.
6. Diagnose and correct failed test demonstrations as follows:
a. Perform diagnostic tests and activities required to determine the fundamental cause
of issues observed.
b. Record each step of the diagnostic procedure prior to performing the procedure.
Update written procedure as changes become necessary.
C. Record the results of each step of the diagnostic procedure.
d. Record the conclusion of the diagnostic procedure on the fundamental cause of the
issue.
e. Determine and record corrective measures.
£ Include diagnosis of fundamental cause of issues in commissioning compliance
issue report.
7. Retest:
a. Schedule and repeat the complete test procedure for each test demonstration for
which acceptable results are not achieved. Obtain signature of Owner's witness on
retest data forms. Repeat test demonstration until acceptable results are achieved.
Except for issues that are determined to result from design errors or omissions, or
other conditions beyond Contractor's responsibility, compensate Owner for direct
costs incurred as the result of repeated test demonstrations to achieve acceptable
results.
b. For each repeated test demonstration, submit a new test data form, marked
"Retest."
8. Do not correct commissioning compliance issues during test demonstrations.
a. Exceptions will be allowed if the cause of the issue is obvious and resolution can
be completed in less than five minutes. If corrections are made under this
exception, note the deficient conditions on the test data form and issue a
commissioning compliance issue report. A new test data form, marked "Retest,"
shall be initiated after the resolution has been completed.
3.6 SEQUENCING
A. Sequencing of Commissioning Verification Activities: For a particular material, item of
equipment, assembly, or system, perform the following in the order listed unless otherwise
indicated:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 12 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
1. Construction Checklists:
a. Material checks.
b. Installation checks.
C. Start up, as appropriate. Some startup may depend on component performance.
Such startup may follow component performance tests on which the startup
depends.
d. Performance Tests:
1) Static tests, as appropriate.
2) Component performance tests. Some component performance tests may
depend on completion of startup. Such component performance tests may
follow startup.
3) Equipment and assembly performance tests.
4) System performance tests.
5) Intersystem performance tests.
2. Commissioning tests.
B. Before performing commissioning tests, verify that materials, equipment, assemblies, and
systems are delivered, installed, started, and adjusted to perform according to construction
checklists.
C. Verify readiness of materials, equipment, assemblies, and systems by performing tests prior to
performing test demonstrations. Notify Engineer if acceptable results cannot be achieved due to
conditions beyond Contractor's control or responsibility.
D. Commence tests as soon as installation checks for materials, equipment, assemblies, or systems
are satisfactorily completed. Tests of a particular system may proceed prior to completion of
other systems, provided the incomplete work does not interfere with successful execution of
test.
3.7 SCHEDULING
A. Commence commissioning as early in the construction period as possible.
B. Commissioning Schedule: Integrate commissioning into Contractor's construction schedule. See
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."
1. Include detailed commissioning activities in monthly updated Contractor's construction
schedule and short interval schedule submittals.
2. Schedule the start date and duration for the following commissioning activities:
a. Submittals.
b. Preliminary operation and maintenance manual submittals.
C. Installation checks.
d. Startup, where required.
e. Performance tests.
f. Performance test demonstrations.
g. Commissioning tests.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 13 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
h. Commissioning test demonstrations.
3. Schedule shall include a line item for each installation check, startup, and test activity
specific to the equipment or systems involved.
4. Determine milestones and prerequisites for commissioning. Show commissioning
milestones, prerequisites, and dependencies in monthly updated critical -path -method
construction schedule and short interval schedule submittals.
C. Two -Week Look -Ahead Commissioning Schedule:
1. Two weeks prior to the beginning of tests, submit a detailed two-week look -ahead
schedule. Thereafter, submit updated two-week look -ahead schedules weekly for the
duration of commissioning.
2. Two-week look -ahead schedules shall identify the date, time, beginning location,
Contractor personnel required, and anticipated duration for each startup or test activity.
3. Use two-week look -ahead schedules to notify and coordinate participation of Owner's
witnesses.
D. Owner's Witness Coordination:
1. Coordinate Owner's witness participation via Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer of commissioning schedule changes at least two work days in advance
for activities requiring the participation of Owner's witness.
3.8 COMMISSIONING REPORTS
A. Test Reports:
Pre -startup reports include observations of the conditions of installation, organized into
the following sections:
a. Equipment Model Verification: Compare contract requirements, approved
submittals, and provided equipment. Note inconsistencies.
b. Preinstallation Physical Condition Checks: Observe physical condition of
equipment prior to installation. Note conditions including, but not limited to,
physical damage, corrosion, water damage, or other contamination or dirt.
C. Preinstallation Component Verification Checks: Verify components supplied with
the equipment, preinstalled or field installed, are correctly installed and functional.
Verify external components required for proper operation of equipment correctly
installed and functional. Note missing, improperly configured, improperly
installed, or nonfunctional components.
d. Summary of Installation Compliance Issues and Corrective Actions: Identify
installation compliance issues and the corrective actions for each. Verify that
issues noted have been corrected.
e. Evaluation of System Readiness for Startup: For each item of equipment for each
system for which startup is anticipated, document in summary form acceptable to
Owner completion of equipment model verification, preinstallation physical
condition checks, preinstallation component verification checks, and completion of
corrective actions for installation compliance issues.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 14 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
2. Test data reports include the following:
a. "As -tested" system configuration. Complete record of conditions under which the
test was performed, including, but not limited to, the status of equipment, systems,
and assemblies; temporary adjustments and settings; and ambient conditions.
b. Data and observations, including, but not limited to, data trend logs, recorded
during the tests.
C. Signatures of individuals performing and witnessing tests.
d. Data trend logs accumulated overnight from the previous day of testing.
Commissioning Compliance Issues Reports: Report as commissioning compliance issues
results of tests and test demonstrations that do not comply with acceptance criteria.
Report only one issue per commissioning compliance issue report. Use sequentially
numbered facsimiles of commissioning compliance issue report form included in this
Section, or other form approved by Owner. Distribute commissioning compliance issue
reports to parties responsible for taking corrective action. Identify the following:
a. Commissioning compliance issue report number. Assign unique, sequential
numbers to individual commissioning compliance issue reports when they are
created, to be used for tracking.
b. Action distribution list.
C. Report date.
d. Test number and description.
e. Equipment identification and location.
f. Briefly describe observations about the performance associated with failure to
achieve acceptable results. Identify the cause of failure if apparent.
g. Diagnostic procedure or plan to determine the cause (include in initial submittal)
h. Diagnosis of fundamental cause of issues as specified below (include in
resubmittal).
i. Fundamental cause of unacceptable performance as determined by diagnostic tests
and activities.
j. When issues have been resolved, update and resubmit the commissioning issue
report forms by completing Part 2. Identify resolution taken and the dates and
initials of the persons making the entries.
k. Schedule for retesting.
4. Weekly progress reports include information for tests conducted since the preceding
report and the following:
a. Completed data forms.
b. Equipment or system tested, including test number, system or equipment tag
number and location, and notation about the apparent acceptability of results.
C. Activities scheduled but not conducted per schedule.
d. Commissioning compliance issue report log.
e. Schedule changes for remaining Commissioning -Process Work, if any.
5. Data trend logs shall be initiated and running prior to the time scheduled for the test
demonstration.
a. Trend log data format shall be multiple data series graphs. Where multiple data
series are trend logged concurrently, present the data on a common horizontal time
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 15 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
axis. Individual data series may be presented on a segmented vertical axis to avoid
interference of one data series with another, and to accommodate different axis
scale values. Graphs shall be sufficiently clear to interpret data within the accuracy
required by the acceptance criteria.
b. Attach to the data form printed trend log data collected during the test or test
demonstration.
C. Record, print out, and attach to the data form operator activity during the time the
trend log is running. During the time the trend log is running, operator intervention
not directed by the test procedure invalidates the test results.
6. System Alarm Logs: Record and print out a log of alarms that occurred since the last log
was printed. Evaluate alarms to determine if the previous day's work resulted in any
conditions that are not considered "normal operation."
a. Conditions that are not considered "normal operation" shall be reported on a
commissioning issue report attached to the alarm log. Resolve as necessary. The
intent of this requirement is to discover control system points or sequences left in
manual or disabled conditions, equipment left disconnected, set points left with
abnormal values, or similar conditions that may have resulted from failure to fully
restore systems to normal, automatic control after test completion.
3.9 CERTIFICATE OF CONSTRUCTION PHASE COMMISSIONING COMPLETION
A. When Contractor considers that construction phase commissioning, or a portion thereof which
Owner agrees to accept separately, is complete, Contractor shall prepare and submit to Owner
and Commissioning Authority through Engineer a comprehensive list of items to be completed
or corrected. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter Contractor's responsibility to
compete commissioning.
B. On receipt of Contractor's list, Commissioning Authority will make an inspection to determine
whether the construction phase commissioning or designated portion thereof is complete. If
Commissioning Authority's inspection discloses items, whether included on Contractor's list,
which is not sufficiently complete as defined in "Construction Phase Commissioning
Completion" Paragraph in the "Definitions" Article, Contractor shall, before issuance of the
Certificate of Construction Phase Completion, complete or correct such items on notification by
Commissioning Authority. In such case, Contractor shall then submit a request for another
inspection by Commissioning Authority to determine construction phase commissioning
completion.
C. Contractor shall promptly correct deficient conditions and issues discovered during
commissioning. Costs of correcting such deficient conditions and issues, including additional
testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for
Engineer's and Commissioning Authority's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall
be at Contractor's expense.
D. When construction phase commissioning or designated portion is complete, Commissioning
Authority will prepare a Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning that shall establish
the date of completion of construction phase commissioning. Certificate of Construction Phase
Commissioning Completion shall be submitted prior to requesting inspection for determining
date of Substantial Completion.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 16 of 17

SECTION 019113 -GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
END OF SECTION 019113
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 019113 Page 17 of 17

SECTION 024116 -STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I . Demolition and removal of buildings and site improvements.
2. Abandoning in-place Removing below -grade construction.
3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, abandoning in-place, and removing site utilities.
4. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner.
1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.
B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control
and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
1. Adjacent Buildings: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent buildings to
remain including means of egress from those buildings.
C. Schedule of building demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity.
D. Predemolition photographs or video.
E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 024116 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 024116 -STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory of items that have been removed and salvaged.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA -approved certification
program.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work.
B. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct building
demolition so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted.
1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent
occupied buildings.
2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of
adjacent buildings.
a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of
adjacent buildings without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
I . Before building demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a. All equipment and supplies stored inside.
b. Furnishings
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
under a separate contract.
E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.
F. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations or operations
of adjacent occupied buildings.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 024116 Page 2 of 6

SECTION 024116 -STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with AS SE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
2.2 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations.
B. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or
adjacent structures during building demolition operations.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Utilities to be Disconnected: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities
serving buildings and structures to be demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off utilities when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 024116 Page 3 of 6

SECTION 024116 -STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
3. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied
buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be
demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.
4. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed
and verified in writing.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other
building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings.
B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural
support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
C. Existing Utilities to Remain: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage
during demolition operations. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or
operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and
covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated.
Comply with requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities.
2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip
line of groups of trees to remain.
4. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people
and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
5. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures.
6. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain
and that are exposed to building demolition operations.
7. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust, noise, and
dirt migration to occupied portions of adjacent buildings.
E. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open
excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in
place.
3.5 DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish indicated buildings and site improvements completely. Use methods
required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 024116 Page 4 of 6

SECTION 024116 -STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain
portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations.
2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 24 hours after flame -cutting operations.
3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
4. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris -removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with
governing environmental -protection regulations.
C. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
D. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower
level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing
supporting members on the next lower level.
E. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
F. Demolish foundation walls and other below -grade construction that are within footprint of new
construction and extending 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction.
Remove below -grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings,
completely.
G. Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below -grade utility structures that are within
5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon utilities outside this area.
H. Hydraulic Elevator Systems: Demolish and remove elevator system, including cylinder,
plunger, well assembly, steel well casing and liner, oil supply lines, and tanks.
I. Below -Grade Areas: Completely fill below -grade areas and voids resulting from building
demolition operations with any combination of satisfactory soil materials, recycled pulverized
concrete, and recycled pulverized masonry according to backfill requirements in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free
from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades
and new grades.
K. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 024116 Page 5 of 6

SECTION 024116 -STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA -approved
construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. and
recycle or dispose of them according to Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and
Disposal."
B. Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024116
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 024116 Page 6 of 6

SECTION 033000 -CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 033000 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast -in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Specifications Provided by Structural Engineer and/or shown on Structural and Building plans
shall take precedence over these specifications.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 312000 'Barth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles of Project, indicating
location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each
raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
3. Laboratory Test Reports: For curing and sealing compounds, indicating compliance with
requirements for low -emitting materials.
C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material certificates.
B. Material test reports.
C. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 033000 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 033000 -CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction
testing on concrete mixtures.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
1. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
B. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301.
2. ACI 117.
2.2 FORM -FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 033000 Page 2 of 10

SECTION 033000 -CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 60 percent.
B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
C. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
D. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars,
ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I zinc coated after fabrication and bending.
E. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars,
ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent
damaged coating in each 12 -inch bar length.
F. Plain -Steel Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as -
drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
G. Deformed -Steel Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.
H. Galvanized -Steel Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated
from galvanized -steel wire into flat sheets.
I. Epoxy -Coated Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, Type 1,
deformed steel.
J. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded -wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Regional Materials: Concrete shall be manufactured within 100 miles of Project site from
aggregates that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within
100 miles of Project site.
B. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, gray.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.
C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded.
1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal or as shown on structure plan
documents and specifications. .
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
D. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 033000 Page 3 of 10

SECTION 033000 -CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and
that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive
or pressure -sensitive tape.
2.7 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of
floor covering.
1. Products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public
Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
2.8 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber
or ASTM D 1752, cork or self -expanding cork.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 033000 Page 4 of 10

SECTION 033000 -CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce
the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40
percent.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water -reducing high -range water -reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water -reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
w/c ratio below 0.50.
2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Normal -Weight Concrete:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1 -1/2 -inch
nominal maximum aggregate size.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
6. Synthetic Micro -Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's
recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 1.0 lb/cu. yd..
f►•�f��::: �1:11Y1►[�'ii�f1► ��]Z- ►�ii�►Ifl
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.12 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 033000 Page 5 of 10

SECTION 033000 -CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 VAPOR -RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Engineer.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 033000 Page 6 of 10

SECTION 033000 -CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch -wide joints into concrete when cutting
action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
fC�'��.V:���3.�IL�I�I►fyLlll�1�/:11�[�)�I
A. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
fc�I�K�] � [�17 �l I � � 7 r/.T�J �] � I � ► M 1
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections are completed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit
concrete to avoid segregation.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits
on formed -surface irregularities.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface
irregularities.
Apply to concrete surfaces to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or
covering material applied directly to concrete.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth -formed -finished as -cast concrete where
indicated:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 033000 Page 7 of 10

SECTION 033000 -CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1. Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
2. Grout -Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine
sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in
amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces.
Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with
clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork -Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix 1 part portland
cement and 1 part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches
adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion,
finish surface with a cork float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with AC1302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull -
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch
in one direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power -driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
Apply float finish to surfaces indicated.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin -film -
finish coating system.
2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10 -ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 033000 Page 8 of 10

SECTION 033000 -CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
E. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated. While concrete
is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel -finished floor surfaces.
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere
as indicated.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Engineer before application.
3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 305.1 for hot -
weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder
of curing period.
D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material
and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere
with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 033000 Page 9 of 10

SECTION 033000 -CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
END OF SECTION 033000
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 033000 Page 10 of 10

SECTION 055000 -METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
2. Prefabricated building columns.
3. Shelf angles.
4. Metal ladders.
5. Ladder safety cages.
6. Metal floor plate and supports.
7. Elevator pit sump covers.
8. Structural -steel door frames.
9. Miscellaneous steel trim.
10. Metal bollards.
11. Wire rope parking garage guards.
12. Pipe Downspout guards.
13. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted -channel inserts, and wedge -type inserts indicated
to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not
specified in other Sections.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Prefabricated building columns.
2. Metal nosings and treads.
3. Paint products.
4. Grout.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
content and cost.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055000 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 055000 -METAL FABRICATIONS
E. Delegated -Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design ladders.
B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings, shall
withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in
ANSI A14.3.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
rrar►����r:�:�y
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
E. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
F. Rolled -Stainless -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
G. Abrasive -Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface or with
abrasive material metallically bonded to steel.
H. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold -formed steel tubing.
I. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
J. Zinc -Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A 741.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055000 Page 2 of 8

SECTION 055000 -METAL FABRICATIONS
1. Wire -Rope Fittings: Hot -dip galvanized -steel connectors with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they
are used.
K. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold -formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: As indicated.
2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90
coating; 0.108 -inch nominal thickness.
3. Material: Cold -rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B; 0.0966 -
inch minimum thickness; hot -dip galvanized after fabrication.
L. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless
otherwise indicated.
M. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
N. Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 6328 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
O. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
P. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).
Q. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400
(leaded Bemired brass).
R. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel
bronze).
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941,
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
B. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
C. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055000 Page 3 of 8

SECTION 055000 -METAL FABRICATIONS
D. Slotted -Channel Inserts: Cold -formed, hot -dip galvanized -steel box channels (struts) complying
with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than
3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee -head bolts,
complete with washers and nuts, all zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as
needed for fastening to inserts.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water -Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments
that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and
compatible with topcoat.
B. Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D I I87M.
E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
F. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal -
weight, air -entrained, concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055000 Page 4 of 8

SECTION 055000 -METAL FABRICATIONS
F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches
O.C.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction.
C. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes
indicated.
1. Where wood hailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes
at 24 inches o.c.
D. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel
baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and
connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe
wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4 -inch bolts, spaced not more than 6
inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and
concrete.
C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc -rich primer.
E. Furnish wedge -type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast -in-
place concrete.
2.8 STRUCTURAL -STEEL DOOR FRAMES
A. Fabricate structural -steel door frames from steel shapes, plates, and bars of size and to
dimensions indicated, fully welded together, with 5/8 -by -1 -1/2 -inch steel channel stops. Plug -
weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints. Reinforce frames and drill and
tap as necessary to accept finish hardware.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for securing door frames into adjoining
concrete or masonry.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055000 Page 5 of 8

SECTION 055000 -METAL FABRICATIONS
B. Galvanize exterior steel frames.
C. Prime exterior steel frames with zinc -rich primer.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc -rich primer.
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
1. Cap bollards with 1/4 -inch -thick steel plate.
B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8 -inch -thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill
baseplates at all four corners for 3/4 -inch anchor bolts.
C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4 -inch -thick steel plate
welded to bottom of sleeve.
D. Prime bollards with zinc -rich primer.
2.11 WIRE ROPE PARKING GARAGE GUARDS
A. Wire Rope Parking Garage Guards: 3/4 -inch -diameter, zinc -coated steel wire ropes with wire
rope fittings for securing to parking garage columns and walls and for tightening wire rope.
2.12 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
2.13 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055000 Page 6 of 8

SECTION 055000 -METAL FABRICATIONS
C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc -rich primer.
2.14 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.15 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded
in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc -rich primer is indicated.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055000 Page 7 of 8

SECTION 055000 -METAL FABRICATIONS
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fill metal -capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before
installing.
B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4 -inch bolts at
each bollard unless otherwise indicated.
C. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular
space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout.
D. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
E. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have
been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack
grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION 055000
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055000 Page 8 of 8

SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum pipe and tube railings.
2. Stainless-steel pipe and tube railings.
B. Related Requirements:
I . Section 055112 "Metal Pan Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal pan stairs.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
content and cost.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
E. Delegated -Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055213 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger
bolt and that provides 1 -1/2 -inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall
surface.
2.3 ALUMINUM
A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.
B. Extruded Bars and Tubing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/13429M, Alloy 6063-T6.
D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210, Alloy 6063-T832.
E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, Alloy 6061-T6.
G. Castings: ASTM B 26/1326M, Alloy A356.0 -T6.
H. Perforated Metal: Aluminum sheet, ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6, 0.063 inch thick, with 1/4 -
inch holes 3/8 inch o.c. in staggered rows.
I. Woven -Wire Mesh: Intermediate -crimp, diamond pattern, 2 -inch woven -wire mesh, made from
0.162 -inch -diameter wire complying with ASTM B 211, Alloy 6061-T94.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055213 Page 2 of 7

SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.
C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.
D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
E. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type I (expanded), Class 3 (corrosion -resistant steel), made
from stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
1. Style Designation: 3/4 number 13.
F. Perforated Metal: Stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304,
0.062 inch thick, with 1/4 -inch holes 3/8 inch o.c. in staggered rows.
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
2. Hot -Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot -dip zinc -coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
3. Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
4. Stainless -Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc -plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055213 Page 3 of 7

SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
E. Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
F. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc -coated metal
and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
G. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.
H. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.
I. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/1) 1 187M.
J. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
D. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with
concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system
of sleeve and socket fittings.
E. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
F. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
G. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each
repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend
without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
H. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055213 Page 4 of 7

SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
I. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush -
resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
K. Expanded -Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from expanded metal made from same
metal as railings in which they are installed.
Orient expanded metal with long dimension of diamonds as indicated on Drawings.
L. Perforated -Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from perforated metal made from same
metal as railings in which they are installed.
I. Orient perforated metal with pattern as indicated on Drawings.
M. Woven -Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven -wire mesh crimped into 1 -
by -1/2 -by -1/8 -inch metal channel frames. Make wire mesh and frames from same metal as
railings in which they are installed.
Orient wire mesh with as indicated on Drawings.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
B. Mill Finish: AA -M12, nonspecular as fabricated.
C. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41.
D. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating, and applying and baking finish.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.9 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel Tubing Finishes:
1. 180 -Grit Polished Finish: Uniform, directionally textured finish.
2. 320 -Grit Polished Finish: Oil -ground, uniform, fine, directionally textured finish.
3. Polished and Buffed Finish: 320 -grit finish followed by buffing to a high luster finish.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055213 Page 5 of 7

SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
B. Stainless Steel Sheet and Plate Finishes:
1. Directional Satin Finish: ASTM A 489/A 480, No. 4.
2. High Luster Finish: ASTM A 480/A 480M. No. 7.
3. Mirror Finish: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 8.
17:� 71rc��fii1��[�]►1
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines
and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished
after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means
without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in
contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.
3.2 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted
into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or
anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Form or core -drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and
placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members.
3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Locate brackets as
indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055213 Page 6 of 7

SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or
lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between
studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop -painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION 055213
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 055213 Page 7 of 7

SECTION 061000 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Shear wall panels.
4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
5. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
6. Wood furring and grounds.
7. Wood sleepers.
8. Plywood backing panels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles of Project, indicating
location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each
raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
2. Chain -of -Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.
3. Chain -of -Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.
4. Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with
requirements for low -emitting materials.
5. Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content.
6. Laboratory Test Reports: For installation adhesives, indicating compliance with
requirements for low -emitting materials.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC -ES:
1. Wood -preservative -treated wood.
2. Fire -retardant -treated wood.
3. Engineered wood products.
4. Shear panels.
5. Power -driven fasteners.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061000 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 061000 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
6. Post -installed anchors.
7. Metal framing anchors.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by
an FSC -accredited certification body.
B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited
certification body.
17:1711VA393sIoilZ41161
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Regional Materials: The following wood products shall be manufactured within 100 miles of
Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 100 miles of Project site.
1. Dimension lumber.
2. Laminated -veneer lumber.
3. Parallel -strand lumber.
4. Prefabricated wood 1 -joists.
5. Rim boards.
B. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to
FSC STD -01-001 and FSC STD -40-004.
1. Dimension lumber.
2. Laminated -veneer lumber.
3. Parallel -strand lumber.
4. Prefabricated wood 1 -joists.
5. Rim boards.
C. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC
Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to
inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
I . Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2 -inch nominal thickness or less; 19
percent for more than 2 -inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061000 Page 2 of 7

SECTION 061000 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
E. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current
model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in
effect for Project.
Allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those
indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by
rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA Ul; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or
unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade.
2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire -
test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame -spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant
progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame
front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during
the test.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061000 Page 3 of 7

SECTION 061000 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire -
retardant -treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
C. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln -dry plywood
after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing
agency.
E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Framing for raised platforms.
2. Framing for stages.
3. Concealed blocking.
4. Framing for non -load-bearing partitions.
5. Framing for non -load-bearing exterior walls.
6. Roof construction.
7. Plywood backing panels.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.
1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load bearing.
2. Species:
a. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB.
b. Northern species; NLGA.
C. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
d. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
B. Framing Other Than Non -Load -Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade.
1. Application: Framing other than interior partitions not indicated as load bearing.
2. Species:
a. Hem -fir (north); NLGA.
b. Southern pine; SPIB.
C. Douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
d. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB.
e. Spruce -pine -fir; NLGA.
f. Douglas fir -south; WWPA.
g. Hem -fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
h. Douglas fir -larch (north); NLGA.
i. Spruce -pine -fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061000 Page 4 of 7

SECTION 061000 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
C. Exposed Framing: Hand -select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from
characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including
decay, honeycomb, knot -holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane.
Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type.
m.�aLlMIeIgoX1;791QVIT16Z6]109:Z6)118L4111I161
A. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made using ultra -low -emitting formaldehyde
resins as defined in the California Air Resources Board's "Airborne Toxic Control Measure to
Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products" or shall be made with no
added formaldehyde.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
C. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and
grades:
1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA.
3. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
4. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Power -Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on ICC -ES AC70.
C. Post -Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on ICC -ES ACO1 or ICC -ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061000 Page 5 of 7

SECTION 061000 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.
B. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those of basis -of -
design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by
rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate
to withstand same loads as framing anchors.
C. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
D. Hot -Dip, Heavy -Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-
strength low -alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low -alloy steel Type B
(HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.
Use for wood -preservative -treated lumber and where indicated.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Glass -fiber -resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill
sealer; 1 -inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
rubber or rubberized -asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
D. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying
with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.
2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061000 Page 6 of 7

SECTION 061000 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking,
grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
D. Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install
fasteners through each fastener hole.
F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated
lumber.
H. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC).
2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two -
Family Dwellings.
3. ICC -ES evaluation report for fastener.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet
enough that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA -registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label.
END OF SECTION 061000
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061000 Page 7 of 7

SECTION 061063 -EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 061063 - EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood fences.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For preservative -treated wood products.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles of Project, indicating
location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each
raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
2. Chain -of -Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.
3. Chain -of -Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.
A. Material Certificates:
1. For preservative -treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net
amount of preservative retained.
B. Evaluation Reports: For preservative -treated wood products, from ICC -ES.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by
an FSC -accredited certification body.
B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited
certification body.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061063 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 061063 -EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by
ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the
applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For items that are exposed to view in the completed Work, mark grade stamp on end or
back of each piece.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Regional Materials: Products shall be manufactured within 100 miles of Project site from
materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 100
miles of Project site.
C. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD -01-001
and FSC STD -40-004.
D. Maximum Moisture Content:
1. Boards: 15 percent.
2. Dimension Lumber: 19 percent for 2 -inch nominal thickness or less; no limit for more
than 2 -inch nominal thickness.
3. Timber. 19 percent.
2.2 LUMBER
A. Dimension Lumber: Select Structural grade and any of the following species:
1. Hem -fir or hem -fir (North); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Douglas fir -larch, Douglas fir -larch (North), or Douglas fir -south; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
3. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
4. Redwood; RIS.
B. Boards: Any of the following species and grades:
1. Douglas fir, C & Btr finish or C Select; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Hem -fir, C & Btr finish or C Select; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Redwood, Heart Clear; RIS.
4. Southern pine, B & B finish; SPIB.
5. Western red cedar, Clear Heart; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.3 POSTS
A. Dimension Lumber Posts: No. 2 grade and any of the following species:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061063 Page 2 of 4

SECTION 061063 -EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY
1. Douglas fir -larch, Douglas fir -larch (North), or Douglas fir -south; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
3. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
B. Timber Posts: Balsam fir, Douglas fir -larch, Douglas fir -larch (North), eastern hemlock
tamarack (North), hem -fir, southern pine, western hemlock, or western hemlock (North); No. 1,
NeLMA, NLGA, SPIB, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. Timber Posts: Southern pine; No. 1, SPIB.
2.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
A. Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservative according to
AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and
Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
B. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use
Category UC4a.
1. Treatment with CCA shall include post-treatment fixation process.
C. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium.
D. After treatment, redry dimension lumber to 19 percent maximum moisture content.
E. Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's
Board of Review.
1. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark each piece on surface that
will not be exposed.
F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and
manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches
into wood substrate.
1. Use stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.
2. For pressure -preservative -treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Postinstalled Anchors: Stainless-steel, chemical or torque -controlled expansion anchors with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061063 Page 3 of 4

SECTION 061063 -EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
and inspecting agency.
1. Stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy
Group 1 or 2.
A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
steel sheet complying with
A. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit work
to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCDI unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
E. Apply copper naphthenate field treatment to comply with AWPA M4, to cut surfaces of
preservative -treated lumber.
F. Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
1. ICC -ES AC70 for power -driven fasteners.
2. "Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code.
3. "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members" and "Alternate Attachments" in ICC's
International Residential Code for One- and Two -Family Dwellings.
END OF SECTION 061063
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 061063 Page 4 of 4

SECTION 221113 -FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water -distribution piping and related components outside the building for
water service.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of
field assembly, and components.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality -control test reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water
mains and backflow prevention.
2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable -water -service piping,
including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire -suppression water -
service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.
D. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire -
service -main products.
E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve
and hydrant supervision for fire -service -main piping for fire suppression.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 221113 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 221113 -FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
F. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable -water -service piping. Include marking "NSF-
pw" on piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61 Annex G for materials for water -service piping and specialties for
domestic water.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Water -Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary water -distribution service according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of water -distribution service without Owner's written
permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SPECIFICATION INCLUDED BY REFERENCE
A. Carolina Water Service of NC, Inc Written Specification for Water Systems
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 ATTACHMENTS
A. Carolina Water Service of NC, Inc Written Specification for Water Systems
END OF SECTION 2211 l 3
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 221113 Page 2 of 9

SPECIFICATIONS
Water Distribution
Utilities, Inc:
Utilities, Inc.
5701 WESTPARK DRIVE, SUITE 101
P.O. BOX 240908
CHARLOTTE, NC 28224-0908
[phone]

1.OWATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
1.1 Water Distribution Piae
PVC pipe shall be PVC 1120, in accordance with AWWA C-900. All 2" water
main pipe shall be PVC 1120 in accordance with ASTM D-2241. The pipe
shall be minimum Pressure Class 200 with a SDR of 14 or less for C-900 pipe
and a SDR of 21 or less for ASTM 2241 pipe. All PVC Water Pipe must bear Na-
tional Sanitation Foundation logo. PVC pipe will require saddles for service taps
and the installation of a tracer wire as shown in the standard details herein.
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be designed as per ANSI A21.50 for a working pressure of
200 psi, laying condition B. Pipe shall be minimum Class 50, and manufactured
as per AWWA C141 in 18 ft. lengths. Pipe joints shall be of the push -on type as
per AWWA C151, Paragraph 51-2.6. Pipe lining shall be cement mortar with a
seal coat of bituminous material, all in accordance with AWWA C104. D.I.P.
shall only be used where noted on the plans.
1 9\/AX/PC,
Gate valves greater than 2 inches shall meet all requirements of AWWA C500
(latest revision), for a working pressure of 200 psi. All shall be mechanical joint
(except for use on blow -off assemblies or backflow preventers) with iron body,
bronze mounting double disc parallel seat type with a non -rising stem with a
double "O" ring seal, 2" square operating nut, and open -left as furnished by
Mueller, American Valve and Hydrant or Clow.
Valves shall be properly located, operable and at the correct elevation. The
valve box shall be centered over the wrench nut and seated on a solid concrete
block without touching the valve assembly. Tracer wire to be pulled up and
"looped" inside valve box. Valve locations shall be marked with a "V" in the con-
crete curbing.
All valve boxes shall be cast iron of the screw or telescopic type, with a 5 inch
opening with "water" cast in the cover. Refer to standard detail W-5.

1.3BIow-Off Assemblies
The assembly shall be constructed as shown on Standard Drawing W-4 for
Blow -off Assemblies. The gate valves shall meet all requirements of AWWA
C500 and shall have a non -rising stem, "O" -ring seals and screwed ends, 2"
operating nut, and open -left as furnished by Mueller or American Valve and Hy-
drant. Tracer wire to be pulled up and "looped" inside valve box.
1.4 Water Pipe Fittings
Pipe fittings shall be compact or ductile iron mechanical joint fittings designed
and manufactured as per AWWA C153 and rated at a working pressure of 350
psi. Fitting shall be lined with cement mortar with a seal coat of bituminous mate-
rials, all in accordance with AWWA C104.
Reaction Blocking for all fittings of components subject to hydrostatic thrust shall
be securely anchored by the use of concrete blocks poured in place. Refer to
standard drawings for details. Wrap fittings in 6 mil plastic before pouring block-
ing concrete. Material for reaction blocking shall be 3000 psi concrete.
1.5 Services
Refer to standard drawings W-1 and W-3 for all details regarding services.
Piedmont and Coastal Areas: Use 3/4" polyethylene "black roll pipe" only (200
psi -rated) from corporation stop to meter box. Mountain Areas: Use 3/4" type
"K" copper.
1.6 Installation
The trench shall be excavated to the proper depth to permit installation of the
pipe along the lines and grades shown on the construction drawings. Pipe shall
have a minimum cover of 36" minimum trench width at the top of the pipe and
shall be at least 18" greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. Where exca-
vation is in rock, the rock shall be removed to a depth of at least 6" below grade
and shall be backfilled with suitable material. Wet trenches shall be stabilized
with #78M stone or with a base layer of #57 stone. Shoring or bracing of pits,
trenches and other excavations shall be in accordance with the requirements of
the North Carolina Department of Transportation and the Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Act.
All pipe shall be laid to its manufacturer's recommendations. The subgrade at
the bottom of the trench shall be shaped to secure uniform support throughout
the length of the pipe. A space shall be excavated under the bell of each pipe to
provide space to relieve bearing pressure on the bell and to provide room to ad-
equately made the joint.
Open ends of pipe shall be plugged with a standard plug or cap at all times when
pipe laying is not in progress. Trench water shall not be permitted to enter pipe.

Backfill material shall be free from stones greater than 4 inches in diameter, con-
struction materials debris, frozen material, organic matter, or unstable material.
Compact to a density of no less than 95 percent maximum dry density as meas-
ured by AASHO Method T99. Backfill material shall be placed in lifts of 8 inches
or less of the uncompacted soil. All trenches shall be properly backfilled at the
end of each working day.
1.7 Hydrostatic Tests
No valve in the existing water system shall be operated without giving a minimum
of 48 hours notice to Carolina Water Service, Inc. Water mains shall be subject-
ed to pressure and leakage tests in accordance with A.W.W.A. Standard C600
(latest revision). Hydrostatic tests for a section of line to be tested shall be slowly
filled with water at a rate which will allow complete evacuation of air from the line.
The line shall be tested to a pressure of 200 psi, or 1-1/2 times the normal work-
ing pressure as measured at the lowest elevation of the line, whichever is great-
er, for a minimum duration of 2 hours. Test pressure is to be maintained within
±5 psi of the "start" test -pressure. The pressure gauge used in the hy-
drostatic test shall be calibrated in increments of 10 psi or less. At the end of the
test period, the leakage shall be measured with an accurate water meter.

Pipe Size
Allowable Leakage
Inches
Gal./Hr./1000 ft. of pipe
2
0.21
3
0.32
4
0.42
6
0.64
8
0.85
12
1.27
16
1.70
20
2.12
24
2.55
All visible leaks are to be repaired regardless of the amount of leakage.
1.8 Chlorination
All additions or replacements to the water system shall be chlorinated, and pass-
ing bacteriological samples taken before being placed in service.
Chlorination of a completed line shall be carried out in the following manner:
a) Taps will be made at the control valve at the upstream end of the line and
at all extremities of the line including valves.
b) A solution of water containing high test hypochlorite (65% available chlo-
rine) shall be introduced into the line by regulated pumping at the control -valve
tap. The solution shall be of such a concentration that the line shall have a uni-
form concentration of 50 ppm total chlorine immediately after chlorination.
The chart which follows shows the required quantity of 65% granular hypo-
chlorite compound to be contained in solution in each 1000 ft. section of line to
produce the desired concentration of 50 ppm.

Pounds High Test Hypochlorite (65%)
Pipe Size Per 1000 Feet of Line
2" 0.11
3" 0.24
4" 0.42
6" 0.95
8" 1.68
10" 2.61
12" 3.77
14" 5.13
16" 6.70
20" 10.51
24" 15.10
The solution shall remain in lines for 24 hours. Extreme care will be exercised at
all times to prevent the HTH solution from entering existing mains.
1.9 Bacteriological Sampling
Flushing of lines may proceed after 24 hours. Flushing shall be continued until a
DPD -Chlorine Test check shows that the lines contain only the normal chlorine
residual. (<1.0 mg/1)
Samples for bacteriological analysis shall be collected by the Contractor and
analyzed by a State certified laboratory 24 hours after flushing is completed.
If test results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall immediately rechlorinate
lines and proceed with such measures as are necessary to secure properly disin-
fected lines.
1.95 Testing and Inspection
NOTIFY CAROLINA WATER SERVICE, INC. BEFORE BEGINNING
CONSTRUCTION, and prior to testing any completed section. A 48-hour no-
tice may be required.

All materials used on the project must have a preliminary inspection by Carolina
Water Service, Inc. and Engineer before materials are used for construction pur-
poses. Rejection of materials not meeting specifications will be ordered by Caro-
lina Water Service, Inc. or Engineer, and such materials shall be immediately
removed from the job site.
The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor and equipment necessary to per-
form all testing to the satisfaction of Carolina Water Service, Inc. and the Engi-
neer. Fees for water sample testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Water for
testing purposes will be provided by Carolina Water Service, Inc. upon notifying
Carolina Water Service, Inc. at least 48 hours in advance of the testing water re-
quirement.

SECTION 221313 -FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
SECTION 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hub -and -spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
3. Nonpressure -type transition couplings.
4. Pressure-type pipe couplings.
5. Expansion joints and deflection fittings.
6. Backwater valves.
7. Cleanouts.
8. Encasement for piping.
9. Manholes.
10. Concrete.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and
covers.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of pipe and fitting.
B. Field quality -control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SPECIFICATION INCLUDED BY REFERENCE
A. Carolina Water Service of NC Written Specification for Water Systems
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 221313 Page 1 of 12

SECTION 221313 -FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
PART 3 - ATTACHMENTS
3.1 Carolina Water Service of NC Written Specification for Water Systems
END OF SECTION 221313
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 221313 Page 2 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
Wastewater
Collection
Utilit Ls, Inc.
Utilities, Inc.
5701 WESTPARK DRIVE, SUITE 101
P.O. BOX 240908
CHARLOTTE, NC 28224-0908
[phone]

2.OWASTEWATER COLLECTOR SYSTEM
2.1 Gravitv Sewer Main Materials
Ductile iron pipe shall be designed as per ANSI A21.50 and ANSI A21.51 for a
working pressure of 150 psi, laying condition B. Pipe shall be manufactured as
per AWWA C141 in 18 ft. minimum lengths.
Pipe joints shall be of the push -on type as per AWWA C151. Pipe lining shall be
cement mortar with a seal coat of bituminous material, all in accordance with
AWWA C104.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe shall be made of PVC plastic having a cell classifi-
cation of 12454-B, 12454-C, or 13364-B (with minimum tensile modulus of
500,000 psi) as defined in Specifications D1784. PVC pipe shall have integral
wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of domestic sewage. Fittings shall
be made of PVC plastic having a cell classification of 12454-B, 12454-C, or
13364-B as defined in Specifications D1784. Fittings must be manufactured by
pipe supplier or approved equal, and have bell and/or spigot configurations com-
patible with that of the pipe. Compounds with superior properties are also ac-
ceptable.
Pipe shall have a maximum Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) of 35. Where lay-
ing conditions so warrant, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommenda-
tions, lower SDR values (stronger pipe) may be required.
Installation shall consist of either Class I or Class II bedding material (as defined
hereinafter), placed 6" below the pipe barrel and continuing to a minimum of 6"
above the pipe, as per ASTM D2321. In addition, the installation of PVC pipe
shall satisfy the flexible pipe requirements as outlined hereinafter. No Clay or
VCP Pipe will be accepted.
Additional Requirements for PVC Pipe
PART 4 - Installation of PVC pipe shall follow the recommendations of ASTM -D-
2321 "Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe". For
flexible pipe bedding and embedment material shall be either Class I or
Class II. In any area where the pipe will be installed below existing or future
ground water levels or where the trench could be subject to inundations, on-
ly Class I material shall be used for bedding and embedment.
PART 5 - B. The manufacturer's specifications or otherwise approved method
shall be used in determining the stiffness class of the pipe to be installed so
as to attain the required deflection control. The class of the pipe must be ap-
proved by the Engineer prior to installation.
C. The maximum allowable deflection after installation shall BE LESS THAN 5%
of the pipe diameter. The mandrel (go/no-go) deflection test must be performed
on each line prior to acceptance, and no less than 30 days after installation. The

Contractor shall supply the mandrel used for this performance test. The mandrel
device shall be cylindrical in shape and have 9 possible contact points with the
pipe. The mandrel's length and diameter (ID of proving ring) shall equal the di-
mensions in the following table, and shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
For flexible PVC pipes, the following shall apply:
Nominal Proving Ring
Diameter Length Dia. Mandrel
8" 8" 7.40"
D. For flexible PVC pipe, the pipe shall be produced with bell and spigot end
construction. Joining will be accomplished by rubber gasket in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation, unless otherwise directed or approved by the
Engineer. Flexible watertight elastomeric seals in accordance with ASTM
D3212-81, may also be used. Each pipe length shall be clearly marked with in-
formation including pipe size, profile number, and class number.
E. A minimum trench width shall be one pipe diameter plus 9" on each side of
the pipe.
F. The bedding (6" minimum) and embedment materials shall be per ASTM
D2321. The embedment materials shall be installed from trench wall to trench
wall and from the invert to a minimum of 6" above the crown of the pipe.
G. The bedding and embedment materials shall be compacted to a minimum of
90% Standard Proctor density for Class I and II materials. Bedding and embed-
ment materials classifications shall be defined as follows:
Class I
Angular (1/4" to 1-1/2") graded stone, including a
number of fill materials that have regional significance
such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, crushed
gravel and crushed shells.
Class II
Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size
of 1-1/2", including variously graded sands and gravels
containing small percentages of fines, generally granular
and non -cohesive, either wet or dry. Soil types GW,GP,
SW & SP are included in this class.
H. The minimum design slope for gravity sewer mains shall be 0.6%, and no
gravity lines will be accepted with less than 0.5% slope "installed".

2.2 Manholes
Manholes shall be precast concrete. Precast concrete manholes shall meet
ASTM C478 as to design and manufacturer. The standard joint shall be sealed
with a plastic cement putty meeting Federal Specification SS -S-00210, such a
Ram-Nek or a butyl rubber sealant. Mastic material must show both inside and
outside the manhole after installation. Refer to standard drawings S-1 and S-2.
Manhole rings and covers shall be cast iron meeting the requirements of ASTM
A48 Class 30 with "Sanitary Sewer" cast in the cover and two 1" perforated
holes, as furnished by Vulcan (Type V-1383). The casting shall be machined to
give an even and continuous bearing on the full length of the frame. Castings
that rattle under traffic loading shall be replaced at no cost. All manhole rings in
roadways shall be encased in a concrete collar 18 inches by 6 inches of 3000 psi
concrete beneath the asphalt, with the cover flush with the top of the pavement.
See standard drawing S-4.
Manhole steps shall be placed at 16 inches O.C. and composed of composite
plastic -steel as manufactured by M.A. Industries or equal. See standard drawing
S-4.
Above -ground manholes and all off-road manholes shall have the frame bolted to
the pre -cast section of the manhole with acceptable anchors. A maximum (3)
courses of brick may be used in adjusting the frame to proper grade for man-
holes located within paved roadways. Only precast riser sections to be used for
height adjustment of off-road manholes. Mastic material must be placed uniform-
ly under the frame for complete seal.
All manholes shall have a monolithic precast base section resting on a minimum
of 6 inches of #57 stone. Sewer mains shall enter and exit radially through the
manhole. Inverts shall be constructed of 1:2 concrete mortar with a width and
height equal to 1/2 that of the effluent pipe and shall be so brushed and troweled
that a minimum energy loss occurs in the manhole. At each inlet and outlet of
line 8 inches or greater, wastewater lines are to be connected to the manholes by
means of flexible sleeves cast into the manhole section. Flexible connectors are
to be manufactured of high quality rubber or synthetic rubber and all strap clamps
or draw bolts are to be manufactured from stainless steel.
2.3Trenchinq for Gravity Sewer Mains
The trench shall be excavated to the proper depth to permit installation of the
pipe along the line and grades shown on the construction drawings. Minimum
trench width at the top of the pipe shall be at least 18" greater than the outside
diameter of the pipe. Where excavation is in rock, the rock shall be removed to a
depth of at least 6" below grade and shall be backfilled with suitable material.

Wet trenches shall be stabilized with #78M stone or with a base layer of #57
stone.
Shoring or bracing of pits, trenches and other excavations shall be in accordance
with the requirements of the applicable Department of Transportation and the
Federal Occupational Safety & Health Act.
All pipe shall be laid in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The
subgrade at the bottom of the trench shall be shaped to secure uniform support
throughout the length of the pipe. A space shall be excavated under the bell of
each pipe to provide space to relieve bearing pressure on the bell and to provide
room to adequately make the joint.
Open ends of pipe shall be plugged with a standard plug or cap at all times when
pipe laying is not in progress. Trench water shall not be permitted to enter pipe.
Backfill material shall be free from stones greater than 4" in diameter, construc-
tion material debris, frozen material, organic material, or unstable material.
Compact to a density of no less than 95% maximum dry density as measured by
ASHTO Method T99. Backfill material shall be placed in lifts of 8" of less of the
uncompacted soil. All trenches shall be properly backfilled at the end of each
working day.
2.4 Service Connection
Taps for services into trunk lines shall be made on the top quarter of the main
with the wye saddle angled with the main sewer line flow.
Service connections for the sanitary sewer lines should be as shown on the
drawings and standard drawings S-11, S-12, and S-14. Where a service line is
connected to a manhole, the line shall terminate at the edge of invert in the man-
hole.
Cast iron soil pipe shall be service weight hub and spigot meeting Federal Speci-
fications WW -401. The joints shall be rubber type elastomeric or no -hub fittings.
Where installation by boring is specified, cast iron soil pipe shall be used.
PVC pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1785 (Schedule 40), supplied
in 20 foot lengths, and shall be solvent welded.
Services may tie into manholes.
2.5 Relation of Sanitary Sewers to Water Mains or Storm Sewers
Sanitary sewers shall be laid at least 10 feet laterally from existing or proposed
water mains unless the elevation of the top of the sewer is at least 18 inches be-
low the bottom of the water main with a horizontal separation of at least 3 feet.

Where a sanitary sewer and a water main cross, and the vertical separation is
less than 18 inches or the water line passes under the sewer, both the sewer and
the water main shall be ductile iron pipe for a distance of 10 feet on each side of
the point of crossing. The water line pipe section shall be centered at the point of
crossing.
Sanitary sewers shall have the top of pipe at least 12 inches below the bottom of
storm sewer pipe when the horizontal separation is 3 feet or less from existing or
proposed storm sewers. Where a sanitary sewer and a storm sewer cross, and
the vertical separation is less than 12 inches, the sanitary sewer shall be ductile
iron pipe equivalent to water main standards for a distance of 10 feet on each
side at the point of crossing. The sanitary pipe section shall be centered at the
point of crossing.
2.6Testing and Inspection
NOTIFY CAROLINA WATER SERVICE, INC. BEFORE BEGINNING
CONSTRUCTION, and before testing any completed section. A 48-hour notice
may be required.
All materials used on the project must have a preliminary inspection by Carolina
Water Service, Inc. and the Engineer before materials are used for construction
purposes. Rejection of materials not meeting specifications will be ordered by
Carolina Water Service, Inc. or Engineer, and such materials shall be immediate-
ly removed from the job site.
The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, and equipment to perform all
testing to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Water for testing purposes will be pro-
vided by the Contractor with cooperation from Carolina Water Service, Inc.
whenever possible with prior notice of the testing water requirement. The follow-
ing tests shall be performed on completed sanitary sewer lines before ac-
ceptance by Carolina Water Service, Inc.
A. Visual: Sanitary sewer lines shall be free and clean from obstructions and
shall be visually inspected from every manhole with a mirror or other suitable de-
vice to ensure all lines exhibit a fully circular pattern. Lines which do not exhibit a
true line and grade or have structural defects shall be corrected.
B. Exfiltration: Gravity sewer mains shall be tested for exfiltration by air test.
Exfiltration tests shall be performed on every reach of sanitary sewer line. If the
test fails the requirements as stated herein, the section shall be retested. If the
test fails again, the Contractor shall repair the problem and retest until the reach
passes the test.
Prior to the performance of an air test, the groundwater shall be determined by
measuring the water level in air excavation beside each manhole in the reach to
be tested, or in another manner agreeable to Carolina Water Service, Inc. and
the Engineer. The measured height (in feet) of water above the invert of the

sewer pipe shall be divided by 2.31 to determine the groundwater pressure (in
psi). The test gauge used in the air test shall be calibrated to increments of no
more than 2 pounds and shall be located outside of the manhole.
The low-pressure air testing shall be performed after laterals or stubs are in-
stalled on the line and after the main has been backfilled to finish grade. Plugs
shall be installed at each manhole to seal off the test section. The line will be
pressurized with a single hose and monitored by a separate hose connection
from the plug. Air then shall be slowly introduced into the sealed line until the in-
ternal air pressure reaches 5.0 psi plus the groundwater pressure, but not to ex-
ceed 9.0 psig. The air pressure shall then be allowed to stabilize for a minimum
of 2 minutes at no less than 5.0 (plus groundwater pressure, if any). When the
pressure reaches 4.0, the time required for the pressure to drop 1.0 psi will be
observed and recorded. The line shall be termed "acceptable" if the pressure
does not drop more than 1.0 psi in the time prescribed for the test in Standard Air
Test Table on the following page.
If the section fails to meet these requirements, the source of leakage shall be de-
termined and repaired. The pipe section shall then be retested and shall meet
the specified requirements.
Even though an exfiltration test is specified, the Engineer may also require than
an infiltration test be performed that shall not exceed 100 GPD/inch/mile.
3.OWASTEWATER FORCE MAIN
3.1 Wastewater Force Main Pi
PVC pipe shall have a maximum SDR of 21 and shall have tracer wire attached
to the piping as shown in the standard details herein.
Ductile iron pipe shall be designed as per ANSI A21.50 for a working pressure of
150 psi, laying condition B. Pipe shall be minimum Class 50, and manufactured
as per AWWA C141 as per AWWA C151, Paragraph 51-2.6. Pipe lining shall be
cement mortar with a seal coat of bituminous material, all in accordance with
AWWA C104. DIP shall only be used where noted on the plans.
3.2 Valves
Gate valves greater than 2 inches shall meet all requirements of AWWA C500 for
a working pressure of 150 psi. All shall be mechanical joint (except for use on
blow off assemblies or backflow preventers) with iron body, resilient wedge type
with a non -rising stem and double "O" ring seal, open -left, as furnished by
Mueller, American Valve, and Hydrant or Clow.
Valves shall be properly located, operable and at the correct elevation. The
valve box shall be centered over the wrench nut and seated on a solid concrete

block without touching the valve assembly. Valve locations shall be marked with
a "V" in the concrete curbing.
All valve boxes shall be cast iron of the screw or telescopic type, with a 5 inch
opening with "sewer" cast in the cover. Refer to standard detail W-5.
3.3 Wastewater Force Main Fittings
Pipe fittings shall be compact or ductile iron mechanical joint fittings designed
and manufactured as per AWWA C153 and rated at a working pressure of 350
psi. Fitting shall be lined with cement mortar with a seal coat of bituminous mate-
rial, all in accordance with AWWA C104.
Reaction blocking for all fittings of components subject to hydrostatic thrust shall
be securely anchored by the use of concrete thrust blocks poured in place. Refer
to standard drawings for details. Wrap fittings in 6 mil plastic before pouring
blocking concrete. Material for reaction blocking shall be 3000 psi concrete.
3.4 Installation
The trench shall be excavated to the proper depth to permit installation of the
pipe along the lines and grades shown on the construction drawings.
Pipe shall have a minimum cover of 36". Minimum trench width at the top of the
pipe shall be at least 18 inches greater than the outside diameter of the pipe.
Where excavation is in rock, the rock shall be removed to a depth of at least 6
inches below grade and shall be backfilled with suitable material. Wet trenches
shall be stabilized with #78M stone or with a base layer of #57 stone. Shoring
and bracing of pits, trenches and other excavations shall be in accordance with
the requirements of the applicable Department of Transportation and the Federal
Occupational Safety and Health Act.
All pipe shall be laid to its manufacturer's recommendations. The subgrade at
the bottom of the trench shall be shaped to secure uniform support throughout
the length of the pipe. A space shall be excavated under the bell of each pipe to
provide space to relieve bearing pressure on the bell and to provide room to ad-
equately make the joint.
Open ends of pipe shall be plugged with a standard plug or cap at all times when
pipe laying is not in progress. Trench water shall not be permitted to enter pipe.
Backfill material shall be free from stones greater than 4 inches in diameter, con-
struction material debris, frozen material, organic matter, or unstable material.
Compact to a density of no less than 95 percent maximum dry density as meas-
ured by AASHO Method T99. Backfill material shall be placed in lifts of 8 inches
or less of the uncompacted soil.
All trenches shall be properly backfilled at the end of each working day.

3.5 Hydrostatic Tests
No valve in the existing water system shall be operated without giving a minimum
of 48 hours notice to Carolina Water Service, Inc.
Hydrostatic tests for a section of line to be tested shall be slowly filled with water
at a rate which will allow complete evacuation of air from the line.
The line shall be tested to a pressure of 200 psi, or 1-1/2 times the normal work-
ing pressure as measured at the lowest elevation of the line, whichever is great-
er, for a minimum duration of 2 hours. Test pressure is to be maintained within
±5 psi of the "start" test -pressure. The pressure gauge used in the hydrostatic
test shall be calibrated in increments of 10 psi or less. At the end of the test pe-
riod, the leakage shall be measured with an accurate water meter.
Pipe Size
Allowable Leakage
Inches
Gal./Hr./1000 ft. of pipe
2
0.21
3
0.32
4
0.42
6
0.64
8
0.85
12
1.27
16
1.70
20
2.12
24
2.55
All visible leaks are to be repaired regardless of the amount of leakage.
3.6Testing and Inspection
NOTIFY CAROLINA WATER SERVICE, INC. BEFORE BEGINNING
CONSTRUCTION, and before testing of any completed section. A 48-hour no-
tice may be required.
All materials used on the project must have a preliminary inspection by Carolina
Water Service, Inc. and Engineer before materials are used for construction pur-
poses. Rejection of materials not meeting specifications will be ordered by Caro-
lina Water Service, Inc. or Engineer, and such materials shall be immediately
removed from the job site.
The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, and equipment to necessary to
perform all testing to the satisfaction of Carolina Water Service, Inc. and the En-
gineer. Fees for water sample testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Water for

testing purposes will be provided by Carolina Water Service, Inc. upon notifying
Carolina Water Service, Inc. of the testing water requirement.

SECTION 311000 -SITE CLEARING
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.
2. Removing existing vegetation.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5. Removing above- and below -grade site improvements.
6. Disconnecting, capping, or sealing site utilities.
7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
IUfI.r09144IFAWGIVITH1 W 581 IN
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site -clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by Owner or
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on
Owner's premises where indicated.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
site clearing.
D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation -
control and plant -protection measures are in place.
E. Tree- and Plant -Protection Zones: Protect according to requirements in Section 015639
"Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 311000 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 311000 -SITE CLEARING
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not
available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
fc 9707:37.1\101631
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Verify that trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated have been flagged
and that protection zones have been identified and enclosed according to requirements in
Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation -control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to erosion- and sedimentation -control Drawings and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation -control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Section 015639
"Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 311000 Page 2 of 4

SECTION 311000 -SITE CLEARING
B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are
damaged by construction operations according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary
Tree and Plant Protection."
3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in
place.
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
C. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections; in applicable fire
suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security, and
utilities sections; and in Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" and Section 024119 "Selective
Demolition."
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
I. Grind down stumps and remove roots larger than 3 inches in diameter, obstructions, and
debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.
2. Use only hand methods or air spade for grubbing within protection zones.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
I. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to depth [indicated on Drawings] [of 6 inches] <Insert requirement> in a
manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other
materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust
and erosion by water.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 311000 Page 3 of 4

SECTION 311000 -SITE CLEARING
3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate
new construction.
3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials.
Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials, and transport them to recycling
facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.
END OF SECTION 311000
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 311000 Page 4 of 4

SECTION 312000 -EARTH MOVING
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site.
2. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade walks pavements turf and grasses and plants.
3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
4. Drainage course for concrete slabs -on -grade.
5. Subbase course for concrete walks pavements.
6. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.
7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot -mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying
pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward
capillary flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer. Authorized additional excavation
and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in
the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 312000 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 312000 -EARTH MOVING
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot -mix
asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete
pavement or a cement concrete or hot -mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services
within buildings.
I aft 0121W
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material test reports.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
beginning earth -moving operations.
B. Do not commence earth -moving operations until plant -protection measures specified in
Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to
AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches
in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7
according to AASHTO M 145], or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 312000 Page 2 of 8

SECTION 312000 -EARTH MOVING
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/132940M; with at least 90 percent passing a
1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 294/1)2940M 0; with at least 95 percent passing a
1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/1)2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a
1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/1)2940M; except with 100 percent passing a
1 -inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch
sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility; colored to comply with local practice or requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant, polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide
and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core
encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is
buried up to 30 inches deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth -moving
operations.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth -moving operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary
protection before placing subsequent materials.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 312000 Page 3 of 8

SECTION 312000 -EARTH MOVING
3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil
materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be
authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms
to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles
are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate
to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.
3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.
B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant -Protection Zones:
1. Excavate by hand or with an air spade to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades. If excavating by hand, use narrow -tine spading forks to comb soil and expose
roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that
rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and
Plant Protection."
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of
pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.
Clearance: As indicated.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 312000 Page 4 of 8

SECTION 312000 -EARTH MOVING
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of
pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant -Protection Zones:
1. Hand -excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow -
tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed
roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of utilities.
3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and
Plant Protection."
3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Proof -roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic -tired dump truck
to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated
subgrades.
B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without additional compensation.
3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation
of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28 -day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by
Engineer.
Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by
Engineer.
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 312000 Page 5 of 8

SECTION 312000 -EARTH MOVING
B. Backfill Utility Trenches according Sections 221113 and 221313 and as shown on the
Construction Documents.
C. Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade,
except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
fc�[I�Y�71��1�1�J
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
kA lauto] 1311917Z[K6)►1M61010
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand -operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 98 percent.
3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 312000 Page 6 of 8

SECTION 312000 -EARTH MOVING
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 98
percent.
3.13 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.
Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the
following subgrade tolerances:
1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 -
foot straightedge.
ME! 311.442 ff.32173:T.I7a771MAasIUZM�l EWIlaLi/_10"M`!
A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as
follows:
1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross -slope
grades.
2. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in
layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick.
3. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades,
lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit
weight according to ASTM D 698.
3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS -ON -GRADE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast -in-place concrete slabs -
on -grade as follows:
1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 98 Insert number percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 312000 Page 7 of 8

SECTION 312000 -EARTH MOVING
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform inspections:
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform tests and inspections.
C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Engineer.
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to
depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 312000
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 312000 Page 8 of 8

SECTION 312319 -DEWATERING
SECTION 312319 - DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes construction dewatering.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent
existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points
to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain
dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to
lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to
proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.
B. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls," during dewatering operations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump
equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water
disposal, and surface -water controls.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 312319 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 312319 -DEWATERING
1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering.
2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.
B. Place dewatering system into operation to lower water to specified levels before excavating
below ground -water level.
C. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain
dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails.
3.3 OPERATION
A. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill
materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required.
B. Operate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of
structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Drain water -bearing strata above
and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1. Do not permit open -sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade
softening, and slope instability.
2. Reduce hydrostatic head in water -bearing strata below subgrade elevations of
foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.
3. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below bottom of excavation.
C. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well
holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Survey -Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during dewatering and maintain an
accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify
Engineer if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent
construction.
END OF SECTION 312319
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 312319 Page 2 of 2

SECTION 315000 -EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
SECTION 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor Calculations: For excavation support and protection system. Include analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped utilities, abandoned -in-place support
and protection systems, and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent
existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points
to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide, design, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of
supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and
superimposed and construction loads.
I. Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 315000 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 315000 -EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING
A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade
level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not
to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of
flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of
vertical alignment.
B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as
required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.
C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles.
gip► 4M al 21:389101►Evil
A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock vertical
edges to form a continuous barrier.
B. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in
writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60
inches. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a
horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.
C. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.
3.3 TIEBACKS
A. Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks.
B. Test load -carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks.
Have test loading observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of
excavation support and protection system.
C. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and
hydrostatic pressures.
3.4 BRACING
A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent
work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.
1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work
unless otherwise approved by Architect.
2. Install internal bracing if required to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 315000 Page 2 of 3

SECTION 315000 -EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until
permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Survey -Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during installation of excavation
support and protection systems, excavation progress, and for as long as excavation remains
open. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with
original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions
occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.
3.6 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed
sufficiently to support excavation and earth and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to
avoid disturbing underlying soils and rock or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and
utilities.
1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches
below overlying construction and abandon remainder.
B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place.
END OF SECTION 315000
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 315000 Page 3 of 3

SECTION 321216 -ASPHALT PAVING
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Cold milling of existing asphalt pavement.
2.
Hot -mix asphalt patching.
3.
Hot -mix asphalt paving.
4.
Hot -mix asphalt overlay.
5.
Asphalt curbs.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, separation
geotextiles, unbound -aggregate subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement
shoulders.
2. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at
pavement terminations.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
content and cost.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For each paving material. Include statement that mixes containing
recycled materials will perform equal to mixes produced from all new materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving -mix manufacturer registered with and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.
LDI PN <%Project Number%> SECTION 321216 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 321216 -ASPHALT PAVING
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of Insert applicable standards of NCDOT for asphalt paving work.
1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
17.11 4114
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692/1)692M, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or
cured, crushed blast -furnace slag.
B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, sharp -edged natural sand or sand prepared
from stone, gravel, cured blast -furnace slag, or combinations thereof
C. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242/1)242M or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement,
or other inert material.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Recycled Materials for Hot -Mix Asphalt Mixes: Reclaimed asphalt pavement; reclaimed,
unbound -aggregate base material; and recycled tires, asphalt shingles, or glass from sources and
gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations, equal to performance of
required hot -mix asphalt paving produced from all new materials.
B. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA, and not classified as
"restricted use" for locations and conditions of application. Provide in granular, liquid, or
wettable powder form.
2.3 MIXES
A. Recycled Content of Hot -Mix Asphalt: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 20 percent or more than 50 percent by weight.
1. Surface Course Limit: Recycled content no more than 10 percent by weight.
2. Asphalt Mix and typical pavement section to be provided by Geotechnical Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Proof -roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft
pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades.
LDI PN <%Project Number%> SECTION 321216 Page 2 of 6

SECTION 321216 -ASPHALT PAVING
3.2 COLD MILLING
A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold
milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections
indicated.
1. Mill to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Patch surface depressions deeper than 1 inch after milling, before wearing course is laid.
3.3 PATCHING
A. Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound
base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into perimeter of
adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove
excavated material. Recompact existing unbound -aggregate base course to form new subgrade.
B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat concrete
pieces firmly.
Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal
patches, extending into perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise
indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound -aggregate base
course to form new subgrade.
C. Tack Coat: Before placing patch material, apply tack coat uniformly to vertical asphalt surfaces
abutting the patch. Apply at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd..
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot -mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove
spillages and clean affected surfaces.
D. Placing Patch Material: Fill excavated pavement areas with hot -mix asphalt base mix for full
thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.
fc a/:T ' ; ' :\;7: IW1 6W
A. Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from
substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and
written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted -
aggregate base before applying paving materials.
C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq.
yd..
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot -mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove
spillages and clean affected surfaces.
LDI PN <%Project Number%> SECTION 321216 Page 3 of 6

SECTION 321216 -ASPHALT PAVING
3.5 PLACING HOT -MIX ASPHALT
A. Machine place hot -mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of
mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.
1. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F.
2. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and
tears in asphalt -paving mat.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser
width are required.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to
remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot -mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.6 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct
joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot -mix
asphalt course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches.
3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches.
4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes
work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered"
method according to Al MS -22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving
Operations."
3.7 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot -mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot -mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory -plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and
outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,
and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while
hot -mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot -mix
asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to
ASTM D 2041/1) 2041M, but not less than 90 percent or greater than 96 percent.
LDI PN <%Project Number%> SECTION 321216 Page 4 of 6

SECTION 321216 -ASPHALT PAVING
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot -mix asphalt is still
warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to
proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled
and hardened.
G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
3.8 ASPHALT CURBS
A. Construct hot -mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat
unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at a minimum temperature
of 250 deg F.
1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface -course mix.
B. Place hot -mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard
shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand -placed materials and screed
to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot -mix asphalt has cooled.
3.9 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the
following tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within
the following tolerances as determined by using a 10 -foot straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 1/4 inch.
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch.
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.
Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Replace and compact hot -mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
C. Remove and replace or install additional hot -mix asphalt where test results or measurements
indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
LDI PN <%Project Number%> SECTION 321216 Page 5 of 6

SECTION 321216 -ASPHALT PAVING
3.11 WASTE HANDLING
A. General: Handle asphalt -paving waste according to approved waste management plan required
in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
END OF SECTION 321216
LDI PN <%Project Number%> SECTION 321216 Page 6 of 6

SECTION 321313 -CONCRETE PAVING
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes Concrete Paving Including the Following:
1. Driveways.
2. Roadways.
3. Parking lots.
4. Curbs and gutters.
5. Walks.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 miles of Project, indicating
location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each
raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material.
3. Laboratory Test Reports: For concrete paving mixtures, documentation indicating that
cured concrete complies with Solar Reflectance Index requirements.
C. Samples: For each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring color selection.
D. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ready -Mix -Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -
mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification
Checklist").
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 321313 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 321313 -CONCRETE PAVING
1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
preconstruction testing on concrete paving mixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Plain -Steel Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, fabricated from as -drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
C. Deformed -Steel Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.
D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
E. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain -steel bars; zinc coated (galvanized)
after fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars, welded -wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete
of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Regional Materials: Concrete shall be manufactured within 100 miles of Project site from
aggregates that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within
100 miles of Project site.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and
source throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, gray portland cement Type I.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F.
3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.
4. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M, Type IS, portland blast -furnace slag
cement.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 321313 Page 2 of 7

SECTION 321313 -CONCRETE PAVING
C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 4M, uniformly graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source.
D. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of
cementitious material.
F. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry or cotton mats.
B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self -
expanding cork in preformed strips.
B. Slip -Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory -graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive
aggregate of fused aluminum -oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less
than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by
freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of
normal -weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field
experience.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce
the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40
percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in
concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent.
2. Slag Cement: 50 percent.
3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Slag Cement: 50 percent, with fly ash or pozzolan
not exceeding 25 percent.
C. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal -weight
concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 321313 Page 3 of 7

SECTION 321313 -CONCRETE PAVING
1. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate,
but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd..
F. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written
instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
G. Concrete Mixtures: Normal -weight concrete.
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Solar Reflectance (SR): Three -year -aged SR value of at least 0.28 or initial SR of at least
0.33.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch
discharged and used in the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of
excess yielding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines,
grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can
remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form -release agent to ensure separation from concrete
without damage.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 321313 Page 4 of 7

SECTION 321313 -CONCRETE PAVING
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at
locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving
terminates at isolation joints.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint -filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness:
E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an
edging tool to a 1/4 -inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate edging -tool marks on concrete surfaces.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not
place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and
alignment.
B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or
drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
D. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open -textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
3.7 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power -driven
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 321313 Page 5 of 7

SECTION 321313 -CONCRETE PAVING
floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular
texture.
1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float -finished concrete,
perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.
2. Medium -to -Fine -Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft -bristle broom across float -finished
concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine -line texture.
3. Medium -to -Coarse -Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float -
finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff -bristled broom, perpendicular
to line of traffic.
C. Slip -Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip -resistive aggregate finish on
paving surface according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip -resistive aggregate
manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.
2. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel -wire brush or abrasive stone and water to
expose nonslip aggregate.
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing moisture -retaining -cover curing curing
compound or a combination of these.
3.9 PAVING TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 3/4 inch.
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
3. Surface: Gap below 10 -feet- long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch.
4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 321313 Page 6 of 7

SECTION 321313 -CONCRETE PAVING
3.10 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not
comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint
unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep
paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 321313
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 321313 Page 7 of 7

SECTION 323113 -CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
SECTION 323113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Chain-link fences.
2. Swing gates.
3. Privacy slats.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of fence and gate assembly.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For structural performance of chain-link fence and gate
frameworks, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Product test reports.
C. Sample warranty.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of chain-link fences and
gates that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 323113 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 323113 -CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design chain-link fence and gate frameworks.
B. Structural Performance: Chain-link fence and gate frameworks shall withstand the design wind
loads and stresses for fence height(s) and under exposure conditions indicated according to:
1. Minimum Post Size and Maximum Spacing: Determine according to CLFMI WLG 2445,
based on mesh size and pattern specified.
2.2 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of
selvage knuckle or twist according to "CLFMI Product Manual" and requirements indicated
below:
1. Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Steel Wire for Fabric: Wire diameter of 0.192 inch.
a. Mesh Size: 2 inches.
b. Aluminum -Coated Fabric: ASTM A 491, Type I, 0.40 oz./sq. ft..
C. Zinc -Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type 11, Class 1, 1.2 oz./sq. ft. with zinc
coating applied before weaving.
d. Zn -5 -Al -MM Aluminum-Mischmetal-Coated Fabric: ASTM F 1345, Type III,
Class 1, 0.60 oz./sq. ft..
e. Polymer -Coated Fabric: ASTM F 668, Class 1 over aluminum -coated steel wire.
1) Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range, according to
ASTM F 934.
f. Coat selvage ends of metallic -coated fabric before the weaving process with
manufacturer's standard clear protective coating.
3. Aluminum Wire Fabric: ASTM F 1183, with mill finish, and wire diameter of 0.192 inch.
a. Mesh Size: 2 inches.
4. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
2.3 FENCE FRAMEWORK
A. Posts and Rails: ASTM F 1043 for framework, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and
corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to
ASTM F 1043 or ASTM F 1083 based on the following:
1. Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 323113 Page 2 of 6

SECTION 323113 -CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
2. Horizontal Framework Members: Intermediate top and bottom rails according to
ASTM F 1043.
3. Brace Rails: ASTM F 1043.
4. Metallic Coating for Steel Framework:
a. Type A zinc coating.
b. Type B zinc with organic overcoat.
C. External, Type B zinc with organic overcoat and internal, Type D zinc -pigmented
coating.
d. Type C, Zn -5 -Al -MM alloy coating.
e. Coatings: Any coating above.
5. Polymer coating over metallic coating.
a. Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range, according to
ASTM F 934.
2.4 TENSION WIRE
A. Metallic -Coated Steel Wire: 0.177 -inch- diameter, marcelled tension wire according to
ASTM A 817 or ASTM A 824, with the following metallic coating:
1. Type I: Aluminum coated (aluminized).
2. Type II: Zinc coated (galvanized) with minimum coating weight matching chain-link
fabric coating weight.
3. Type III: Zn -5 -Al -MM alloy with the following minimum coating weight matching
chain-link fabric coating weight.
B. Polymer -Coated Steel Wire: 0.177 -inch- diameter, tension wire according to ASTM F 1664,
Class 1 over aluminum -coated steel wire.
1. Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range, according to ASTM F 934.
2.5 SWING GATES
A. General: ASTM F 900 for gate posts and double swing gate types.
1. Gate Leaf Width: As indicated.
2. Framework Member Sizes and Strength: Based on gate fabric height as indicated.
B. Pipe and Tubing:
1. Zinc -Coated Steel: ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective coating and finish to
match fence framework.
2. Aluminum: ASTM B 429/13429M; mill finish.
3. Gate Posts: Round tubular aluminum.
4. Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular aluminum.
C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded or assembled with corner fittings.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 323113 Page 3 of 6

SECTION 323113 -CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
D. Extended Gate Posts and Frame Members: Fabricate gate posts and frame end members to
extend 12 inches above top of chain-link fabric at both ends of gate frame to attach barbed wire
assemblies.
E. Hardware:
1. Hinges: 360 -degree inward and outward swing.
2. Latch: Permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking
accessible from both sides of gate.
A. Provide fittings according to ASTM F 626.
B. Barbed Wire Arms: Aluminum, with clips, slots, or other means for attaching strands of barbed
wire, and means for attaching to posts, integral with post cap, for each post unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1. Provide line posts with arms that accommodate top rail or tension wire.
2. Provide corner arms at fence corner posts unless extended posts are indicated.
3. Single -Arm Type: Type I, slanted arm.
C. Finish:
1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz./sq. ft. of zinc.
a. Polymer coating over metallic coating.
2. Aluminum: Mill finish.
2.7 BARBED WIRE
A. Steel Barbed Wire: ASTM A 121, two -strand barbed wire, 0.099 -inch- diameter line wire with
0.080 -inch- diameter, four -point round barbs spaced not more than 5 inches o.c.
1. Aluminum Coating: Type A.
2. Zinc Coating: Type Z, Class 3.
B. Polymer -Coated, Galvanized -Steel Barbed Wire: ASTM F 1665, two -strand barbed wire, 0.080-
inch- diameter line wire with 0.080 -inch- diameter, four -point, round aluminum alloy barbs
spaced not more than 5 inches o.c.:
1. Polymer Coating: Class 1 over aluminum -coated steel wire.
a. Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range according to
ASTM F 934.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 323113 Page 4 of 6

SECTION 323113 -CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
2.8 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout, recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
B. Anchoring Cement: Factory -packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic -controlled expansion
cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching,
and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure
without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating, and that is recommended in
writing by manufacturer for exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by
Architect.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or
line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground
structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.
3.3 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Install chain-link fencing according to ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified.
B. Post Excavation: Drill or hand -excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in
firm, undisturbed soil.
C. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in
position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp
for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade; shape and smooth to shed water.
b. Concealed Concrete: Place top of concrete 2 inches below grade to allow covering
with surface material.
C. Posts Set into Sleeves in Concrete: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into
concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted into sleeves, fill annular space
between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement,
mixed and placed according to anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions. Finish anchorage joint to slope away from post to drain water.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 323113 Page 5 of 6

SECTION 323113 -CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
d. Posts Set into Holes in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less than 5 inches
deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert
posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed according to anchoring
material manufacturer's written instructions. Finish anchorage joint to slope away
from post to drain water.
3. Mechanically Driven Posts: Drive into soil to depth of 36 inches. Protect post top to
prevent distortion.
D. Terminal Posts: Install terminal end, corner, and gate posts according to ASTM F 567 and
terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more. For
runs exceeding 500 feet, space pull posts an equal distance between corner or end posts.
E. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet o.c.
F. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of
fence posts. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120 -inch- diameter
hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c. Install
tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. Provide horizontal tension wire at
the following locations:
Extended along top and bottom of fence fabric.
G. Chain -Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1 -inch bottom
clearance between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull
fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains
under tension after pulling force is released.
H. Barbed Wire: Install barbed wire uniformly spaced, angled toward security side of fence. Pull
wire taut, install securely to extension arms, and secure to end post or terminal arms.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive
deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout
entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without
forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
END OF SECTION 323113
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 323113 Page 6 of 6

SECTION 330500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
SECTION 330500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping joining materials.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Sleeves.
4. Identification devices.
5. Grout.
6. Piping system common requirements.
7. Equipment installation common requirements.
8. Concrete bases.
9. Metal supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures
and weather conditions.
B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples
include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Dielectric fittings.
2. Identification devices.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 330500 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 330500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for general -duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAgl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 330500 Page 2 of 10

SECTION 330500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
2.2 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material
body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and
temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 and smaller.
a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig at 180 deg F.
b. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Description: Factory -fabricated, bolted, companion -flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4
and larger.
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
b. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder -
joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric Couplings:
1. Description: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining,
NPS 3 and smaller.
a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
b. End Connections: Threaded.
E. Dielectric Nipples:
1. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining.
a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved.
2.3 SLEEVES
A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
B. Galvanized -Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Cast -Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 330500 Page 3 of 10

SECTION 330500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or
stamped.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and
power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
B. Snap -on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap -on type.
Include color -coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Pressure -Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color -coded, pressure -
sensitive -vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
D. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full -band pipe markers, extending
360 degrees around pipe at each location.
E. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full -band or strip -type pipe
markers, at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
F. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
G. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color -coded, pressure -sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl tape,
at least 3 mils thick.
1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2-1/2
inches for larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 -inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2 -
inch sequenced numbers. Include 5/32 -inch hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.032 -inch- thick, polished brass or aluminum.
2. Material: 0.0375 -inch- thick stainless steel.
3. Material: 3/32 -inch- thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white inner layer.
4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic.
5. Size: 1-1/2 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.
I. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire -link or beaded chain; or brass S -hooks.
J. Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper -base, phenolic -resin -
laminate engraving stock; Grade ES -2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 330500 Page 4 of 10

SECTION 330500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for
mechanical fastening.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment
identification.
2. Thickness: 1/16 inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch for
larger units.
3. Fasteners: Self -tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact -type permanent adhesive.
K. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color
codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.
2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
C. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for
equipment.
2.5 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric unions.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Dielectric flanges.
B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 330500 Page 5 of 10

SECTION 330500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Dielectric nipples.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
I. Sleeves are not required for core -drilled holes.
J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas
2 inches above finished floor level.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum -board
partitions.
L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing -in requirements.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 330500 Page 6 of 10

SECTION 330500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part I "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved -end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket,
lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.
I. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
Pressure -Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain -end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal
fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
K. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 330500 Page 7 of 10

SECTION 330500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
N. Plastic Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain -End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain -End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
O. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.
C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction
of flow.
1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot
noninsulated piping.
2. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark
each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious.
C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible
enclosures.
d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 330500 Page 8 of 10

SECTION 330500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic -laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major
item of equipment.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of
principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple
units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other
Divisions.
3.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of base.
3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
m� 1111139P01811►[el
A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base
plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 330500 Page 9 of 10

SECTION 330500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 330500
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 330500 Page 10 of 10

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
SECTION 432331.05 - DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Under this section, the contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and material
necessary to furnish, install, test and place in operation a Dry -Pit Submersible Pumping
Systems including, but not necessarily limited to, Dry -Pit Submersible Pumps and Pump
System Controls as shown in the plans and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and install two (2) Dry Pit Submersible Pumping Units complete with all
accessories, controls and appurtenances as shown in the plans and specified herein or as
required for a complete operating system. Each Pumping Unit shall be rated for
continuous duty in accordance with the operating conditions of these specifications.
B. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this Section shall be
new, of good quality, and in good condition.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The equipment shall be manufactured by a reputable company with at least twenty (20)
years of experience in the manufacture of dry pit submersible pumps.
B. The Dry Pit Submersible Pumping Units shall conform to all applicable requirements of
NEMA, NEC, SWPA and Hydraulic Institute. For purposes of this specification, the
revision and/or version of the referenced standards in effect on the date bid opening shall
apply.
C. The manufacturer of the pump shall assume full responsibility for the compatibility of the
supplied components with the application. The motor and pump shall be manufactured by
one company providing sole source responsibility for the warranty of the unit.
Manufacturers who do not manufacture the submersible motor and who limit their
warranty to that of the motor manufacturer shall not be acceptable. Additionally, the
products of third parry packagers, assemblers or distributors shall neither be considered
equal, nor shall they be acceptable.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 1 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of shop drawings and/or wiring
diagrams for the major equipment to be installed such as the pump and motor
starters/controls and liquid level control systems.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prior to acceptance of the equipment, three (3)
complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment shall be
supplied to the Engineer by the Contractor.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Pump Warranty: The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units being supplied to the owner
against defects in workmanship and material for a period of five (5) years or 10,000 hours
under the Municipal Wastewater -Permanent Installation Warranty Policy or one (1) year
under the Industrial -Permanent Installation Warranty Policy under normal use, operation and
service. The warranty shall be in printed form and apply to all similar units.
B. Appurtenances Warranty: All accessories and appurtenances shall be warranted against
defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year.
1.06 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. The dry -pit submersible pumping equipment shall be manufactured by Grundfos Water
Utility, Aurora, Illinois or engineer pre -approved equal. Cited examples of equipment
brand names and/or manufacturers are used only to set forth and convey to bidders the
general style, type, character and quality of product desired; equivalent products, as
determined by the Engineer, will be acceptable. The brand of product used on a city,
county or State work shall not limit competitive bidding on future works. Substitution of
materials, items, or equipment of equal or equivalent design shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval or disapproval. Cited examples are used to denote that the
aforementioned equipment manufacturer has the capability to meet the performance
criteria of the specification and does not relieve the manufacturer or Contractor from
meeting all performance criteria outlined in the specification or submitting the required
documentation to the Engineer for approval.
B. Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely and permanently
mounted to each individual piece of equipment furnished under this Section. The
nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non -corrosive material. Critical information
shall be clearly engraved or otherwise permanently stamped on the nameplate, and shall
be fully legible. The information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall include
at least the following:
Manufacturer's Serial Number
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 2 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
2. Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when applicable
4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
Motor size, speed and voltage
6. Enclosure Type or Rating
7. Any other pertinent information
Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial number
validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these requirements will be cause for
rejection of the equipment.
C. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker shall be adhered
to each individual piece of equipment containing the name, address, and telephone
number of the local business that supplied the equipment, and the name, address and
telephone number of the local business that can provide service and replacement parts for
the equipment. A 24-hour emergency service telephone number should also be included.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Pumps:
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install complete vertical dry pit submersible type
pump designed for normal wastewater conveyance under the discharge
conditions shown on the contract drawings and as specified herein. The pump
shall be sized to operate over the following range specified in this section.
2. The dry pit submersible pumping units shall be self-contained, close coupled
pump/motor units designed to operate at continuous full load either submerged or
non -submerged without the need for any external cooling devices or water
jackets. An air-filled motor shall be cooled by an internal closed loop cooling
system. Motor ratings shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of
NEMA, IEEE, ANSI and NEC standards. The motor shall be explosion proof and
inverter duty rated approved for use in Class 1, Division 1, Group C & D
hazardous areas. Motor heat dissipation shall be accomplished by circulating a
heat transfer fluid from an integral reservoir through channels that are internally
cast into the motor stator housing. Separate bolted on cooling jackets, externally
mounted cooling fluid piping, and use of circulating wastewater for cooling
purposes are specifically prohibited. The bottom of the reservoir shall be
designed to provide adequate retention time of the heat transfer fluid to ensure
positive heat transfer. The heat transfer fluid shall be environmentally safe and
shall not require hazardous material disposal. Primary heat transfer shall be
accomplished by convection through the reservoir wall to the pumped fluid.
2. The nameplate ratings of the motor shall be based on 40° C ambient temperature
environment and have a 1.15 service factor. The pump motors shall be designed
to withstand 150 feet of static pressure. All motors shall be furnished and
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 3 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
certified per IEEE 117 with Class H rated insulation materials or better. All
motors not having IEEE 117 certified insulation systems shall be considered not
acceptable. Insulation materials rated lower than Class H (i.e. Class F, B or A)
are specifically prohibited.
3. Contractor to provide certified performance curve and certification of motor
efficiency for each pump.
4. Design Criteria
a.
Number of Pumps.............................................................
Two (2)
b.
Peak Flow Capacity..........................................................
625 GPM
C.
Maximum Static Head ......................................................
89.75 FT
d.
TDH at Peak Capacity ......................................................104
FT
e.
Minimum Shut-off Head...................................................145
FT
f.
Secondary Operating Point ...............................................
375 GPM @ 96' FT
g.
Minimum Efficiency @ Peak Capacity ............................
66%
h.
Maximum Pump Speed.....................................................1800
RPM
i.
Minimum Suction Size Diameter .....................................
8 INCH
j.
Minimum Discharge Size Diameter .................................
6 INCH
k.
Minimum Spherical Diameter Solids Passage ... 3.5 INCH
1.
Maximum Motor Size .......................................................
33 HP
M.
Electrical (Voltage, Phase, Cycles) ...................................
480/3/60
n.
Operation (Constant or Variable Speed) ...........................
VARIABLE
o.
Liquid to be Pumped.........................................................
SEWAGE
B. Bearings and Lubrication:
1. Bearings shall be specifically selected to carry all radial and axial loads imposed
by the pump and motor.
2. The pump shaft shall rotate on two permanently lubricated bearings. Motor
bearings shall be grease lubricated for the life of the bearing. The upper motor
bearing and the lower bearings shall compensate for axial thrust and radial forces
and shall consist of a roller bearing and angular contact lower bearing.
3. Bearings shall be rated to provide a minimum L10 Bearing Life of 100,000 hours
at any design operating point within plus or minus 40% of best efficiency flow
point (BEP) of the pump performance curve. Bearing selection shall limit the
bearing temperature rise to a maximum of 60° C under full load operation.
4. All bearings shall be permanently lubricated with premium moisture resistant
grease containing rust inhibitors and shall be suitable for operation over a
temperature range of -25° C to +120° C. The bearings shall not require any
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 4 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
additional or periodic lubrication. All bearings shall be commercially available
from third party sources other than the pump/motor manufacturer.
C. Shaft Seals:
Mechanical seal shall be a cartridge style encased with a Type 316 stainless steel
housing.
2. Primary seal faces shall be silicon carbide / silicon carbide and secondary seal
faces shall be carbon / ceramic; both fitted with Buna bellows and 0 -rings.
Seal shall reside inside the seal chamber and be cooled by coolant within the seal
chamber.
4. Seal should incorporate within the design a propeller for recirculation of the
coolant fluid for the closed loop cooling system.
5. Cartridge seal shall be positively driven by the pump shaft. Component seals
shall not be considered equal.
D. Pump Protection System:
Each pump shall incorporate three thermal switches, one per stator phase winding
and be connected in series, to monitor the temperature of the stator while the
pump is running. Should the thermal switches open, the motor shall be stopped
and an alarm indication shall be activated.
2. Pumps shall incorporate a normally closed moisture switch connected in series
with the thermal switches via a common voltage supply. The moisture switches
shall be incorporated into the pump to sense moisture in a dry chamber located
directly above the secondary seal. The switch shall be wired in series so that if a
switch opens the motor is de -energized and the pump is stopped. Pump shall not
require the use of special monitoring modules.
E. Cap / Cable Assembly:
A single cable should house both the power wires and control wires. The power
wires shall be sized in accordance with NEC and ICEA standards and shall be of
sufficient length to reach the control panel or junction box without the need of
splices.
2. EMC Shielded power cables shall be provided for operation with the variable
frequency drives to mitigate harmonic distortion.
The pump shall be equipped with a leak -proof stainless-steel cable plug with a
grommet compression fit. The cable entry system shall preclude specific torque
requirements and consist of a cylindrical elastomeric grommets and quick cable
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 5 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
connections to insure a completely watertight and submersible seal. The
assembly shall provide ease of changing the cable using the same entry seal.
F. Electrical:
The dry -pit submersible motors shall successfully operate under power supply
variations per NEMA MG 1, part 31.
2. The dry -pit submersible motors shall be of an air-filled design and shall be
suitable for continuous operation. The motors shall have a minimum 1.15
Service Factor at 40° C ambient temperature.
Stators shall be solid copper wound and shall be press fitted into the stator
housing for true positive alignment and efficient heat transfer. The motor
insulation system shall be Class H minimum, utilizing materials and insulation
systems evaluated and certified with IEEE 117 classification tests. The entire
wound stator assembly shall receive a minimum of three (3) coats of insulating
varnish utilizing a dip and bake process.
4. Three (3) normally closed, automatic reset, thermostats connected in series shall
be embedded in adjoining phases of the stator windings. The thermostats shall be
connected to safely shut down the motor upon opening.
G. Materials of Construction — Motor:
The pump motor shall be a premium efficient induction type, IE3 component
design with a squirrel cage rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled,
watertight chamber according to IEC class IP 68 and NEMA MG1, part 31. Oil
filled motors shall not be considered acceptable or equal. Stator housing to be
ASTM A-48 Class 3513.
2. The motor shall be explosion proof and inverter duty rated approved for use in
Class 1, Division 1, Group C & D hazardous areas. The stator windings and
stator leads shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for
356°F (180°C).
The stator shall be triple dip and baked and heat shrunk fitted into the cast iron
stator housing. The use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices requiring
penetration of the stator housing is not acceptable. The motor shall be designed
for continuous duty handling pumped media of 104°F (40°C) and capable of up
to 20 spaced starts per hour.
4. The motor shall have voltage tolerance of plus or minus 10%. The motor shall be
designed for operation up to 104°F (40°C) ambient temperature, with a
temperature rise of class B not to exceed 176°F (80°C).
5. The motor horsepower shall be adequate so that the pump is non -overloading
throughout the entire pump performance curve from shut-off through run -out.
Service factor shall be 1.15
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 6 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
H. Cooling System — Motor
Pump shall include an integral cooling system of closed loop design with a
nontoxic glycol coolant. The closed loop system shall sufficiently cool the motor
without the need of being submerged in water.
2. Coolant shall be circulated via a propeller incorporated in the impeller design
positively driven by the motor shaft. A dry chamber shall be utilized to sense
any moisture leakage into the motor housing.
Cooling system shall function whether mounted vertically or horizontally. Not
all open loop cooling system shall be considered equal.
I. Materials of Construction — Pump:
Major pump components including casing, impellers, motor frame shall be of at
minimum Class 35B cast iron with smooth surfaces devoid of blowholes or other
irregularities.
2. The pump volute shall be single piece cast iron, ASTM A48; minimum Class
3513, with smooth passages large enough to pass any solids that may enter the
impeller.
The volute shall be connected to the motor housing via bolts that are incorporated
into a Smart Trim system. The Smart Trim is the ability to adjust the clearances
between the impeller neck ring wear surface and the pump housing. This shall be
done without removing any parts or the use of any special tools
4. The thru let on the volute shall be a minimum of 3.5". Standard 125 lb.
discharge connections for the removable guide shoe. Standard wear rings will
not be considered equal.
5. All exposed nuts or bolts shall be 316 stainless steel. All metal surfaces coming
into contact with the pumped media, other than stainless steel, shall be protected
by a factory applied impact -resistance powder coating finish on the exterior of
the pump.
6. Critical mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined
and fitted with NBR 0 -rings. Joint sealing will be the result of controlled
compression of rubber 0 -rings in two planes and O-ring contact of four sides
without the requirement of a specific torque limit. Rectangular cross-sectioned
gaskets requiring specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be
considered as adequate or equal.
7. Pump and motor shaft shall be the same unit. The pump shaft is an extension of
the motor shaft. Motor shaft shall be stainless steel. Pump and motor shall be
shipped from the factory as a finished product.
8. Pumps that are assembled outside of the manufacture's facility are not allowed.
J. Impeller:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 7 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
1. The enclosed single channel, tube style impeller shall be of cast iron ASTM A48
class 35B minimum. Impellers shall be enclosed by nature. No semi open shall
be considered equal.
2. Impellers should be capable of handling minimum 3.5" spherical solid size.
Impellers designs not capable of handling 3.5" spherical solids shall not be
accepted.
3. Impeller to be fitted to the shaft via a tamper slip fit and fitted with a single
impeller bolt recessed out of the flow path to prevent any disruption to the fluid
path within the impeller.
4. Single channel tube impellers shall be wet balanced. Single channel tube
impellers shall be fitted with an axial wear surface in lieu of wear rings. Wear
surface shall be adjustable via adjustment with the volute. Standard wear rings
will not be considered equal.
K. Pump Base:
1. Each pump shall be designed as a submersible pump in a dry application for
continuous operation in a dry environment without external cooling systems.
Pump to be mounted in a vertical orientation with steel mounting pedestals
securing the pump to the foundation.
2. Vertical installations shall incorporate a fabricated steel pump pedestal made
from painted carbon steel. Pedestal shall allow free access to the suction elbow
and Smart Trim. Suction elbow shall be constructed of ASTM A48, Class 35B
with standard 1251b connections and an access port proportionally sized per the
solids handling capability of the pump.
3. Pedestals shall be of sufficient design to allow pump to run at the rated design
point with vibrations limits under that set forth by Hydraulic Institute most
current version.
4. An FEA analysis will be required since the pumps will operate on variable
frequency drives to confirm that the pedestal provided will not exceed HI
vibration suggested limits within the operating range.
5. Suction elbow with integral clean-out and hand -hole cover shall be mounted to
the pump suction cover. The suction elbow and hand -hole cover shall be
constructed of close -grained cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 35B. The hand -hole
cover shall have surfaces that match the internal contours of the elbow to
minimize turbulence and localized wear.
6. The suction elbow shall also be provided with a 2" NPT tapped connection for a
high pressure clean out and a'/4" NPT tapped pressure gauge connection.
7. All bases, foundations, and piping arrangement shall be done in accordance to the
latest Hydraulic Institute recommendations.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 8 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
8. The base shall be designed to support the entire weight of the assembled pump
and motor. The base shall be of adequate height to provide suitable clearance
between the pump suction elbow and the mounting floor and of sufficient
strength to accept all forces imposed by the pump unit. Rebar and anchor bolts
used in the pump base shall be sufficiently tied to the mounting floor to ensure a
rigid, stable mounting surface for the pump unit.
9. The height of the base shall be sufficient so that the centerline of the suction
elbow lines up with the centerline of the suction piping and shall include an
allowance for grouting between the concrete base and the pump mounting
pedestal in accordance with the pump manufacturer's recommendations.
K. Controls:
Furnish and install a complete, packaged control panel for one (1) Triplex pump
station (control panel shall be capable of operating two (2) pumps now and three
(3) pumps in the future). The control panel shall be a completed assembly and
UL labeled as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" with a serialized UL label.
The UL label normally attached by the enclosure manufacturer does not meet the
requirement for the completed assembly.
2. The control panel main short-circuit and overload protection device shall accept a
3-phase, 3 -wire feeder from a 480 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz power supply. An
integral 480/120 VAC, single-phase transformer with short-circuit and overload
protection for pilot circuitry shall be included.
The control panel enclosure shall be surface mounted, NEMA 12 with a latching
mechanism and operating handle for the hinged front door. Enclosure shall be
designed to enclose electrical and electronic equipment and protect against harsh,
industrial environments and sized according to the application, and include 3 -
point door latches. Control panel shall be supplied with mounting feet keeping
the panel a minimum of 18" above the top surface of the control building floor.
4. The exterior door mounted components shall include all items required for a
triplex control panel including
a. Nameplates for each control component mounted on the exterior door.
b. HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switches, for pump operations.
c. Pushbutton switches: 30mm, Heavy duty, NEMA rated, oil tight.
d. Indicating pilot lights: 30mm, NEMA rated, heavy duty, oil tight, with 12
volt lamps.
e. Operating handles for the main circuit breaker and the pump motor circuit
breakers.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 9 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
f. Pump station controller.
g. Elapsed time meters.
5. Interior mounted components shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the
following:
a. Variable frequency drives — Two (2) variable frequency drives will be
installed initially with space provided inside the enclosure and pre -wired
connections for the future third variable frequency drive.
b. Control power transformer with circuit breakers for primary and secondary.
C. Panel heater with thermostat controls.
d. Exhaust fan with thermostat controls.
C. Duplex GFCI receptacle with circuit breaker.
f. Lighting surge arrestor.
g. Phase and voltage monitor to inhibit pump operation on a phase unbalance,
loss of phase, voltage drop or voltage spike.
h. Timing relays
i. Auxiliary relays
j. Terminal blocks for connection of all external wiring.
6. For each pump motor, there shall be included a combination circuit
breaker/overload unit providing overload protection, short-circuit protection,
reset, and disconnect for all phases. Each pump motor overload device shall be
pre -calibrated to match motor characteristics, and factory sealed to insure trip
setting is tamper proof
L. Pump Station Controller - Hardware:
1. The controller shall be microprocessor based capable of having software changes and
updates via personal computer (notebook). The controller user interface shall
have a color display with a minimum screen size of 3-1/2" x 4-5/8" for easy
viewing of system status parameters and for field programming. The display
shall have a back light with contrast adjustment. Password protection of system
settings shall be standard.
2. The controller shall provide internal galvanic isolation to all digital and analog inputs
as well as all fieldbus connections.
3. The pump system controller shall be a standard product developed and supported by
the pump manufacturer.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 10 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
4. The controller shall have the ability to be connected to a battery to maintain power on
controller during periods of loss of supply power.
5. The controller shall have built in data logging capability. Logged vales shall be
displayed on the controller and able to be exported to computer via standard
connection. A minimum of 3600 samples per logged value with the following
parameters available for logging:
a. Average flow -rate (inflow and outflow)
b. Number of flow reading taken
c. Station operating hours
d. Time since service
e. Total Number of pump starts
f. Total Number of pump starts per hour
g. Pump Starts per hour
h. Individual operating hours
i. Discharge pressure (head pressure)
j. Power consumption
k. Average current consumption
1. Number of anti -blocking attempts
6. The controller shall display the following as status readings from a single display
on the controller (this display shall be the default "home" screen):
a. Current station liquid level with corresponding water graphic
b. Alarm status on the station (if any)
c. Lead pump on and off setpoints and graphically display on water graphic
d. System status with current operating mode
e. Status of each pump with current operating mode and total hours run on the
PUMP
£ Estimated flow -rate, (not requiring flow meter connection)
g. Date and Time
h. Station Name
7. The controller shall have as a minimum the following hardware inputs and
outputs:
a. Nine (9) analog inputs (4-20mA, 0-20mA or 0-IOVDC)
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 11 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
b. Thirty (30) digital inputs
c. Twenty three (23) digital relay outputs (240VAC, 2A)
d. Nine (9) analog outputs (4-20mA, 0-20mA or 0-10VDC)
e. 12 PTC inputs for motor protection
f. Ethernet connection
g. Field Service connection to PC for advanced programming and data logging
8. The controller shall be capable of receiving a redundant sensor input to function
as a backup to the primary sensor.
9. The controller shall be capable of displaying instantaneous power consumption
(Watts or kilowatts) and cumulative energy consumption (kilowatt-hours).
10. The controller shall be capable of displaying instantaneous specific energy use
(kw/gpm).
11. The controller shall be capable of displaying an estimated flow -rate on the
default status screen.
M. Pump Station Controller - Functionality:
1. The wastewater pump station controller shall provide "out of the box" control of a
typical lift (empty) station, with an intuitive color user -interface. The pump station
controller shall come with pre -built configuration parameters which are selectable
via the user interface, including:
a. Pump mode, for each pump, between Auto/ Manual / Off.
b. Functionality for advanced pump control of up to 6 pumps.
C. Setpoint adjustment for pump activation/deactivation and level alarms.
d. Level device or ball floats
e. Redundant level device handling from two 4-20mA devices
£ Functionality for grouping and alternation of up to 6 pump
2. Station optimization including:
a. Anti -seizing function (prevent pump from choking/seizing up due to lack of
operation)
b. Maximum pumps to run (overload protection)
C. Maximum starts per hour (pump protection)
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 12 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
d. Inter -pump start and stop delays
e. Maximum run time (turn off inefficient or partially blocked pumps)
f Anti -blocking function - pump controller shall have the ability to "flush" or
"reverse" sewage pumps if the control system deems the pump to be blocked.
Triggers are selected and tolerances set by user and include low flow, current,
torque, power factor, and pump over temperature
g. Foam -Draining function (draining of pump station down to inlet level)
h. Daily Emptying (periodic pump down of station to prevent septic conditions in
low flow stations)
i. Mixer Configuration (operation and optimization of external mixer or flush
valve within the pump station)
j. Pump groups with the ability to select alternation within groups or between
groups
N. Pump Station Controller — Faults and Alarms:
1. The pump system controller shall store up to 50 warning and alarms in memory.
2. The time, date and duration of each alarm shall be recorded.
3. All Faults and Alarms shall be able to be disabled by user.
4. All Faults and Alarms shall have a user adjustable time delay of activation.
5. All Faults and Alarms shall have a Warning option allowing the user to set the
condition with a warning threshold or change the Alarm to a Warning.
6. All Faults and Alarms shall be user selectable to send over SCADA
7. All Faults and Alarms shall be selectable by the user as Automatic reset or
require Manual reset at the control system.
8. Control system shall have a user -defined alarm option available for any alarm of
fault condition not preloaded in to control system
9. The controller shall display all alarm conditions:
Overflow High Level
Dry Running Float Switch Inconsistency
System Power Loss Overflow
High Level Float Switch Inconsistency
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 13 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
Loss of sensor signal (4-20mA) Max Starts/Hour, Pump
VFD Trip/Failure System Failure
Contactor feedback, Pump Flow Meter Failure
Power Meter Failure Controller Hardware Fault
Battery Backup Fault (UPS) Communication Fault (GENIbus)
Communications Card Fault SCADA Callback Error
Ethernet Fault User -defined Sensor Fault
Discharge PSI Sensor Fault Water on Pit Floor
Gas Detector Extra Fault Failure
Motor Protection, Tripped Common Phase Error
Low Flow Auto/On/Off Switch Change
Time for Service Pump Over Temperature
Pump Moisture/Seal Failure Latest Runtime of Pump
VFD not ready Torque
Pump Blocked Contactor Feedback, Mixer
Time for Service, Mixer Max Starts/Hour, Mixer
Loss of Sensor signal (4-20 mA)
O. Pump Station Controller - Flow Monitoring:
1. The pump system controller shall be able to accept a physical flow meter input.
2. Simple Flow Calculation
a. The pump system shall be able to calculate station inflow and pump outflow
rates using volumetric -over -time calculations (i.e. draw down test)
3. Advanced Flow Calculation
a. The pump system shall be able to utilize the following parameters
monitored within the control system to calculate flow within 1% to 2% of a
physical flow meter:
b. Nominal pump power (Pnom)
C. Nominal head pressure (Hnom)
d. Pit Area (sqft)
e. Nominal flow rate (gpm)
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 14 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
f. Head pressure measurements shall be taken at the common discharge
manifold of the pump station utilizing an analog (4-20mA) pressure
transducers as an input to the control system.
P. Pump Station Controller - Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Control:
1. The pump system controller shall have the ability to control up to six (6) variable
frequency drives.
2. The pumps system controller shall be able to control the system in one of the
following control modes:
a. Fixed Frequency (pump is to run at a constant frequency)
b. Linear Control (pump speed is adjusted according to pit inflow)
c. Minimum Control (pump will run at economy frequency, and if flow drops
even further, frequency will drop but keep pump running)
d. PID Control (pump is to controlled from another input other than level or if
user wants to control system using the control parameters Kp, Ti, Td, etc.)
3. The pump system shall have the ability to perform Automatic Energy Optimization
utilizing pump power information and advanced flow information from advanced
flow calculation or a physical flow meter.
a. Determines specific energy curve by adjusting frequency and comparing to
pump wire -to -water efficiency (Wh/gal)
b. Displays specific energy curve for user, which at that point can choose to
run at the calculated economy frequency.
C. System retests periodically.
d. Economy frequency shall be over-ridden to run system at maximum speed
in the event of excessive inflow or if high level alarm
4. The pump system shall be able to communicate commands and speed references to
VFD using hard -wired commands or GENIbus.
Q. Pump Station Controller - Communication:
1. The pump system controller shall have the ability to communicate through the
following common fieldbus protocols via communications card installed inside
the controller:
a. Modbus RTU
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 15 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
b. Modbus TCP/IP
C. Modbus TCP/IP via cellular using CDMA or GPRS
d. GRM via cellular using CDMA or GPRS (3G/4G)
2. The pump system controller shall have the ability to send text messages over GPRS
to up to 3 different phone numbers via communications card installed inside the
controller.
The controller shall have a built in Ethernet connection allowing controller to
connected to network and access of controller via web browser and internet
anywhere around the world where internet communication is available.
4. The controller shall have the ability to communicate GENIbus to down -stream
components that make up the entire control system
R. Variable Frequency Drives:
1. General:
a. Furnish complete VFD as specified herein or in the equipment schedule for
loads designated to be variable speed. VFD's shall be user -selectable for
either constant or variable torque loads.
b. The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into
a variable frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three-phase
AC induction motors. The VFD shall be a six -pulse input design, and the
input voltage rectifier shall employ a full wave diode bridge; VFD's
utilizing controlled SCR rectifiers shall not be acceptable. The output
waveform shall closely approximate a sine wave. The VFD shall be of a
PWM output design utilizing current IGBT inverter technology and voltage
vector control of the output PWM waveform.
c. The VFD shall include a full -wave diode bridge rectifier and maintain a
displacement power factor of near unity regardless of speed and load.
d. The VFD shall produce an output waveform capable of handling maximum
motor cable distances of up to 1,000 ft. (unshielded) without tripping or
derating.
e. The VFD shall utilize an output voltage -vector switching algorithm, or
equivalent, in both variable and constant torque modes. VFD's that utilize
Sine -Coded PWM or Look -up tables shall not be acceptable.
f. VFD shall automatically boost power factor at lower speeds.
g. The VFD will be capable of running either variable or constant torque loads.
In either CT or VT mode, the VFD shall be able to provide its full rated
output current continuously and 110% of rated current for 60 seconds.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 16 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
h. VFD shall offer 1 PI controller. One controller shall operate the drive in
closed loop,
i. An empty pipe fill mode shall be available to fill an empty pipe in a short
period of time, and then revert to the PID controller for stable operation.
Switching of the input power to the VFD shall be possible without interlocks
or damage to the VFD at a minimum interval of 2 minutes.
k. Switching of power on the output side between the VFD and the motor shall
be possible with no limitation or damage to the VFD and shall require no
additional interlocks.
The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fans for quiet operation,
minimized internal losses, and greatly increased fan life.
m. VFD shall provide full torque to the motor given input voltage fluctuations of
up to +10% to -15% of the rated input voltage.
2. Harmonics:
a. The VFD shall provide internal DC link reactors to minimize power line
harmonics and to provide near unity power factor. VFD's without a DC
link reactor shall provide a 5% impedance line side reactor.
3. Protective Features:
a. VFD shall have input surge protection utilizing MOV's, spark gaps, and
Zener diodes to withstand surges of 2.3 times line voltage for 1.3 msec.
b. VFD shall include circuitry to detect phase imbalance and phase loss on the
input side of the VFD.
c. VFD shall include current sensors on all three -output phases to detect and
report phase loss to the motor. The VFD will identify which of the output
phases is low or lost.
d. VFD shall auto-derate the output voltage and frequency to the motor in the
presence of sustained ambient temperatures higher than the normal
operating range, so as not to trip on an inverter temperature fault. The use
of this feature shall be user -selectable and a warning will be exported
during the event. Function shall reduce switching frequency before
reducing motor speed.
e. VFD shall auto-derate the output frequency by limiting the output current
before allowing the VFD to trip on overload. Speed can be reduced, but
not stopped.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 17 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
f. The VFD shall have the option of an integral RFI filter. VFD enclosures shall
be made of metal to minimize RFI and provide immunity
4. Interface Features:
a. VFD shall provide an alphanumeric backlit display keypad, which may be
remotely mounted using standard 9 -pin cable. VFD may be operated with
keypad disconnected or removed entirely. Keypad may be disconnected
during normal operation without the need to stop the motor or disconnect
power to the VFD.
b. VFD shall display all faults in plain text; VFD's, which can display only
fault codes, are not acceptable.
c. All VFD's shall be of the same series, and shall utilize a common control
card and LCP (keypad/display unit) throughout the rating range. The
control cards and keypads shall be interchangeable through the entire range
of drives used on the project.
d. VFD keypad shall be capable of storing drive parameter values in non-
volatile RAM uploaded to it from the VFD, and shall be capable of
downloading stored values to the VFD to facilitate programming of
multiple drives in similar applications, or as a means of backing up the
programmed parameters.
e. A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER -ON
light shall be provided. These indications shall be visible both on the
keypad and on the VFD when the keypad is removed.
f. A start guide menu with factory preset typical parameters shall be provided
on the VFD to facilitate commissioning.
g. VFD shall provide full galvanic isolation with suitable potential separation
from the power sources (control, signal, and power circuitry within the
drive) to ensure compliance with PELV requirements and to protect PLC's
and other connected equipment from power surges and spikes.
h. All inputs and outputs shall be optically isolated. Isolation boards between
the VFD and external control devices shall not be required.
i. There shall be three programmable digital inputs for interfacing with the
systems external control and safety interlock circuitry. An additional digital
input is preprogrammed for start/stop.
j. The VFD shall have two analog signal inputs. One dedicated for sensor input
and one for external set point input.
k. One programmable analog output shall be provided for indication of a drive
status.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 18 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
1. The VFD shall provide two user programmable relays with selectable
functions. Two form `C' 230VAC/2A rated dry contact relay outputs shall
be provided.
in. The VFD shall store in memory the last 5 faults with time stamp and
recorded data.
n. The VFD shall be equipped with a standard RS -485 serial communications
port.
5. Adjustments:
a. VFD shall include an automatic acceleration and deceleration ramp -time
function to prevent nuisance tripping and simplify start-up.
b. The VFD should include control modes for easy operation of different
application. Choosing a control mode should select predefined values for
the PID controller. Based on the typical performance of pumps in the
specified application. Open loop is also a control mode.
c. The VFD will include a user -selectable Auto -Restart function that enables
the VFD to power up in a running condition after a power loss, to prevent
the need to manually reset and restart the VFD.
6. Service Features:
a. Ambient Temperature of the VFD, -10 to 45°C (14 to 113 ❑F)
b. 0 to 95% relative humidity, non -condensing.
c. Elevation to 1000 meters (3,300 feet) without derating.
d. VFD's shall be rated for line voltage of 525 to 690VAC, 380 to 480VAC, or
200 to 240VAC; with +10% to -15% variations. Line frequency variation
of ± 2% shall be acceptable.
e. No side clearance shall be required for cooling of the units.
7. Quality Assurance:
a. The manufacturer shall be both ISO -9001 and ISO -14001 certified.
b. All products shall be CE marked; UL labeled, and meet the requirements of
UL -508C.
c. To ensure quality and minimize infantile failures on the jobsite, all VFD's
shall be completely tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall operate a
dynamometer at full load and speed under elevated temperature conditions.
d. All optional features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper
operation.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 19 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
e. Factory test documentation shall be available upon request.
S. Level Control Systems:
1. The level control system shall start and stop the pump motors in response to changes
in wet well level as set forth herein.
2. Description: The level control system shall consist of a submersible pressure
transducer as the primary control system with two (2) float switches providing
redundant high and low level alarms along with pump on and pump off control in
case of submersible pressure transducer or pump controller failure.
3. The submersible pressure transmitter shall continuously monitor the wet well level
permitting the operator to read wet well level at any time.
4. The submersible pressure transducer shall include integral components to perform all
pressure sensing signal conditioning, EMI and RFI suppression, DC power
supply, and 4-20mA output signals to the pump controller.
5. Mechanical Float Switch Type (Supplemental Controls)
a. The pump station shall utilize mechanical float switch controls as a
supplemental level control system. The level control system shall start and
stop the pumps in accordance to the wet well level. Rising and falling
liquid level in the wet well causes switches within the floats to open and
close, providing start and stop signals to the remainder of the level control
system.
b. Float switches shall be supplied for installation by the contractor. Each
float shall contain a mercury switch sealed in a polypropylene housing,
with 50 feet of power cord, and polypropylene mounting hardware.
C. An alarm silence switch and relay shall provide maintenance personnel a
means to de -energize the external alarm device while corrective actions are
under way. After silencing the alarm, manual reset of the alarm signal shall
provide automatic reset of the alarm silence relay.
6. Additional pump control information shall be provided as specified in Division
16000, and as indicated on the Drawings
T. Equipment Surge Protection:
Provide UL approved, Category C and Category B power and/or surge arresters for
electronic equipment to successfully withstand surges in AC power circuits and
signal circuits per the wave form, voltage amplitude, current amplitude, and
frequency provided in IEEE C62.41.
2. Successfully withstanding transients requires that none of the following conditions
occur as a result of the transient:
a. Erroneous output.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 20 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
b. Component failure.
C. Calibration change exceeding normal tolerances.
U. Panel Nameplates and Identification:
1. Identify each item on the control panel with rectangular nameplates.
2. Provide nameplates with black letters on white background.
3. Minimum letter height is '/2 IN for instrument description and 1/4 IN height for
instrument tag number.
4. For all panels which have a panel identification number, provide 2 IN high white
nameplate with black, 1 IN high lettering with panel identification number.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment shall be installed as shown on the shop drawings and in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. Quality Control: The manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified technical
representative for two (2) days to inspect the installation and provide start-up, field
testing and operator training services.
B. Field Testing:
1. The pumps shall be hydrostatically tested at the manufacturer's plant prior to
shipment. The test pressure shall be within the limits set forth by the Hydraulic
Institute. Certified copies of the test results shall be submitted to the design
engineer upon request.
2. The pumps shall be performance tested at the manufacturer's plant prior to
shipment. The performance shall be within the limits set forth by the Hydraulic
Institute. Certified curves shall be submitted to the design engineer upon request.
3. As a minimum, each finished pump shall be performance tested for total dynamic
head, capacity, efficiency and power requirements at six (6) operating points plus
shut-off head for the selected impeller diameter, of which, the design capacity
operating point shall be included.
4. After installation, a Field Test shall be performed by the installer on each
completed Dry -Pit Submersible Pump System. The pump manufacturer's
authorized representative shall be present for the Field Test. The test shall
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner that the equipment meets all
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 21 of 22

SECTION 43233105 -DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
specified performance criteria, is properly installed and anchored, and operates
smoothly throughout the specified speed range without exceeding the full load
amperage rating of the motor or excessive motor heating. Additionally, the Dry -
Pit Submersible Pumps shall operate within the acceptable field vibration limits
as established by the Hydraulic Institute for this class of equipment at all speeds
and loads within the operating range specified herein.
5. Two (2) Days of Field Service shall be provided by an authorized, factory trained
representative of the Pump Manufacturer. Services shall include, but not
necessarily be limited to, inspection of the completed installation to ensure that it
has been performed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, supervision of all field-testing and activation of the
Manufacturer's Prescribed Warranties.
6. The Contractor and the manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate to the
Owner and the Engineer that the equipment operates as designed and specified.
3.03 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing any special tools or lubrication
devices required to perforin maintenance on any pumping or power unit.
END OF SECTION 432331.05
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 43233105 Page 22 of 22

SECTION 460753 -PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
SECTION 460753 - PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A. This Section covers the Owner supplied nominal capacity 360,000 gpd Sequencing Batch
Reactor Treatment Facility.
B. Supply of the Sequencing Batch Reactor and erection of the stainless steel tankage is covered
under a separate contract as described in Setion 011200 — "Multiple Contract Summary" in
these documents
C. System Description: Furnish all labor, materials, and appurtenances required to provide a
packaged sequencing batch reactor treatment plant system. To be complete and operational with
all control equipment and accessories as shown and specified. The owner will provide the
packaged plant without additional accessories to be installed by Contractor
D. The entire plant shall comply with the Basis of Design presented in Part 2 The plant and all
equipment shall in all respects meet the applicable provisions of NFPA 820, NCDEQ, and all
applicable OSHA requirements.
PART 2 - BASIS OF DESIGN
2.1 Permitted Flow Requirements
Plant Design Capacity 360,000 gpd
Peak Factor 2.5
Peak Design Flow 900,000
A. The SBR shall be designed using an influent flow rate of 1.5 x the nominal capacity (360,000 x
1.5 = 540,000 gpd as a factor of safety and to account for hourly peak flow.
2.2 Influent Characteristics
BOD5 250 mg/L
TSS 250 mg/L
TKN 50 mg/L
NH3-N (Ammonia Nitrogen) 35 mg/L
TP (Total Phosphorous) 10 mg/L
2.3 Effluent Limits - Design
BOD5 15 mg/L
TSS 15 mg/L
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 460753 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 460753 -PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
2.4
2.5
NH3-N (Ammonia Nitrogen)
Aerobic Digester
2.0 mg/L April —October
4.3 mg/L November -March
A. Aerobic digester shall provide a minimum of 30 days sludge storage minimum
Post Treatment Flow Equalization
A. Tank shall have a minimum volume of 9,824 cubic feet above the low water level and provide
adequate storage between reactor batches to maintain 24" freeboard at the design peak flow.
B. Post Aeration shall be provided in the post equalization tank.
1. The assumed DO from the reactor for design shall be 0.0 mg/L.
2. Aeration shall be provided to raise the DO level to 6 mg/L
3. Aeration calculations shall be submitted for review.
PART 3 - TREATMENT PLANT
3.1
3.2
Cid► '7\
A. The Main Treatment Plant shall be equal in quality and all design aspects as an OMNIPACO
SBR Field -Erected System manufactured by Evoqua Water Technologies, LLC (Evoqua)
B. The sequencing batch reactor shall be designed for treating a total of 360,000 gallons per day
average daily flow. An average daily influent flow rate of 560,000 gpd shall be used for design
to account for hourly peak flow fluctuations. The design peak flow shall be as shown in the
Basis of Design. The complete system shall include all necessary equipment for efficient plant
operation as required in the Basis of Design
C. The system shall consist of the following:
1. Two (2) SBR basins,
2. One (1) aerobic digester,
3. One (1) post -equalization basin, and
4. Welded stainless steel tanks, along with installation services
Tank Construction
A. Field -erected tanks will be furnished with the following features:
1. Hydrostatic 304 stainless steel inner and outer tank walls
2. Three (3) hydrostatic 304 stainless steel bulkheads, each with two (2) center kick -braces
3. Base channels with base ring hooks for all walls and bulkheads
4. 30 -inch diameter 304 stainless steel manways with davits for all zones
5. All required stainless steel piping inside of the plant outer wall
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 460753 Page 2 of 9

SECTION 460753 -PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
6. All required stainless steel tank nozzles located in the steel tank walls and bulkheads
7. Stainless steel decanter discharge piping into the post -equalization basin
8. Standard access walkway with aluminum grating, handrails, and toe plates
9. One (1) access stairway with aluminum stair treads and handrails
3.3 SBR SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Equipment for the two -tank SBR System will include the following:
A. Aeration Header:
Two (2) Jet Tech Model CM1040-10 Vari-Cant® Aeration Headers shall be provided.
Each header will include ten (10) Model 40 jet aerators constructed of 304 stainless steel.
The header liquid manifold shall terminate with a 10 -inch flanged connection at the wall
penetration. The in -basin vertical air drop pipe will be constructed of 4 -inch, 304
stainless steel and will begin immediately above the aeration header at the top of the tank
wall with a 4 -inch flanged connection, and will terminate at the horizontal air duct of the
aeration header.
B. SBR Jet Motive Liquid Pump:
Two (2) centrifugal dry -pit pumps will be provided. Each pump will deliver 1,831 GPM
at a total pump head of 21 -feet. Each pump will be furnished complete with: mechanical
seals, mounting plate, 8 -inch discharge flange, and a 15 Hp, 460 volt, 3 ph, 60 hz, TEFC
motor. The pumps shall be capable of influent transfer, automatic sludge wasting, and
automatic Vacflush operation when used in conjunction with the valves listed under
"Additional Equipment". Water lubrication lines to be furnished by Contractor.
C. Decanter:
1. Two (2) Jet Tech Model FLED 10-1500 floating effluent decanters shall be provided and
will be constructed of 304 stainless steel. Decanter supports, automatic control valves,
and in -basin discharge piping shall be provided. The in -basin discharge piping of the
decanter will terminate with a 10 -inch flange and will connect to the flanged wall
penetration that shall be supplied for installation.
D. SBR Blower and Accessories:
1. Three (3) rotary positive displacement blowers will be provided (one common spare able
to be utilized for each basin).
2. Each blower will be selected to deliver 500 SCFM at 10.25 PSIG when operated at 100°F
and 2,600 feet MSL.
Each blower will be furnished complete with: sound enclosure, inlet filter, external intake
screen/silencer, inlet silencer, discharge silencer, inlet and discharge sleeve -type
expansion joints, butterfly valve, check valve, pressure relief valve, base plate, V -belt
drive, and a 40 Hp, 1800 RPM, 460 volt, 3ph, 60 hz, TEFC, premium efficiency motor.
Blowers will operate on VFDs provided by Contractor.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 460753 Page 3 of 9

SECTION 460753 -PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
E. Influent Distribution/Sludge Collection Manifold:
Two (2) 10 -inch diameter, 304 stainless steel Jet Tech Model IDSC10-1900 manifolds,
including supports, will be provided.
F. Vacflush® Aerator Cleaning System and Waste Sludge:
1. Two (2) Omniflo® SBR Vacflush Header Cleaning and Waste Sludge Systems shall be
utilized. All necessary automatic valves for operation of the Vacflush Header Cleaning
System and Waste Sludge System will be provided and shall be as described under
"Additional Equipment" below.
2. Out -of basin cross-over piping as well as pump suction and discharge piping to be
supplied by Contractor.
G. Instrumentation:
One (1) level transducers with stilling well
2. One (1) emergency top water level float will be provided for each per SBR basin.
H. D.O. Control:
A dissolved oxygen control system will be provided.
2. The D.O. control system will utilize operator adjustable D.O. set points to control blower
speed and on / off operation during the aeration period.
One (1) D.O. probe with mounting bracket and one (1) analyzer will be provided for each
SBR basin.
3.4 AEROBIC DIGESTER EQUIPMENT
Equipment for one (1) aerobic digester will include the following:
A. Digester Aeration Header:
One (1) Jet Tech Model CM880-3 Vari-Cant aeration header will be provided.
2. Each header will include three (3) Model 80 jet aerators constructed of 304 stainless
steel.
The header liquid manifold shall terminate with an 8 -inch flanged connection at the wall
penetration supplied during installation. A 4 -inch, 304 stainless steel in -basin vertical air
drop pipe will be included.
4. The in -basin drop pipe will begin immediately above the aeration header at the top of the
tank wall, with a 4 -inch flanged connection, and terminate at the horizontal air duct of the
aeration header.
B. Digester Jet Motive Liquid Pump:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 460753 Page 4 of 9

SECTION 460753 -PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
One (1) centrifugal dry -pit pump will be provided.
2. The pump will be selected to deliver 1,098 GPM at a total pump head of 21 feet.
The pump will be furnished complete with: mechanical seals, mounting plate, 6 -inch
discharge flange, and a 10 Hp, 460 volt, 3 ph, 60 hz, TEFC motor.
4. The pumps shall be capable of automatic sludge wasting, and automatic Vacflush
operation when used in conjunction with the valves listed under "Additional Equipment".
Water lubrication lines to be provided by others.
C. Digester Blower and Accessories:
One (1) rotary positive displacement blower will be supplied.
2. The blower will deliver 240 SCFM at 10.25 PSIG when operated at 100°F and 2,600 feet
MSL.
Each blower will be furnished complete with: sound enclosure, inlet filter, external intake
screen/silencer, inlet silencer, discharge silencer, inlet and discharge sleeve type
expansion joints, butterfly valve, check valve, pressure relief valve, base plate, V -belt
drive, and a 25 Hp, 1800 RPM, 460 volt, 3ph, 60 hz, TEFC, premium efficiency motor.
4. The blower will operate on VFD provided by others.
D. Telescoping Valve:
One (1) telescoping valve capable of 96 -inch of vertical travel will be provided for
digester supernatant removal.
E. Instrumentation:
One (1) level transducer with stilling well, and three (3) water level floats will be
provided for low water cutoff, high water level, and pump restore level.
F. D.O. Control:
A dissolved oxygen control system will be provided that utilizes operator adjustable D.O.
set points to control blower speed and on / off. The D.O. control system will be provided
with one (1) D.O. probe with mounting bracket and one (1) analyzer
3.5 POST -EQUALIZATION EQUIPMENT
A. Fixed Diffusers:
Three (3) removable Coarse Bubble Diffuser Systems will be provided.
2. Each system will consist of two (2) stainless steel diffusers (for a total of six (6) in the
post equalization basin), stainless steel supports, isolation ball valve, and 304L stainless
steel air drop pipe.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 460753 Page 5 of 9

SECTION 460753 -PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
B. Post -Equalization Blower and Accessories:
One (1) rotary positive displacement blower will be provided to deliver 144 SCFM at 6.4
PSIG when operated at 100°F and 2,600 feet MSL.
2. The blower will be furnished complete with: sound enclosure, inlet filter, external intake
screen/silencer, inlet silencer, discharge silencer, inlet and discharge sleeve type
expansion joints, butterfly valve, check valve, pressure relief valve, base plate, V -belt
drive, and a 10 Hp, 1800 RPM, 460 volt, 3ph, 60 hz, TEFC, premium efficiency motor.
The blower will operate on VFD provided by others.
C. Instrumentation:
One (1) level transducer with stilling well, and one (1) water level float will be provided
for high water level.
D. D.O. Control:
A dissolved oxygen control system will be provided that utilizes operator adjustable D.O.
set points to control blower speed and on / off operation.
2. The D.O. control system will be provided with one (1) D.O. probe with mounting bracket
and one (1) analyzer.
E. Effluent Flow Metering:
One (1) 6" effluent mag meter will be provided in order to maintain consistent flowrate
from the post -equalization basin to the downstream filter.
2. The SBR Control Panel will monitor flow versus operator adjustable set point for desired
flowrate and modulate an effluent valve.
A HWL float override will be utilized to open the valve 100% if tripped.
3.6 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT
A. Valves: The below -listed valves will be furnished.
1. Two (2) 6 -inch automatic plug valves for SBR influent control
2. Four (4) 10 -inch automatic plug valves for SBR jet pump suction and discharge
3. Six (6) 8 -inch automatic plug valves for SBR Vacflush and W.A.S. operation
4. One (1) 8 -inch modulating plug valve for post -equalization effluent
5. Two (2) 8 -inch automatic plug valves for digester jet pump suction and discharge
6. Three (3) 6 -inch automatic plug valves for digester Vacflush and waste sludge
7. Two (2) 10 -inch automatic butterfly valves for SBR decant control
8. Four (4) 6 -inch manual butterfly valves for blower isolation
9. All automatic valves will have 120 volt single phase electric motor actuators. Power for
the valves will be provided during installation. The valves will not be powered by the
SBR control panel.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 460753 Page 6 of 9

SECTION 460753 -PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
B. Supports:
1. All necessary supports for the in -basin equipment to be supplied by plant manufacturer
and as described above are included. Supports will be constructed of 304 stainless steel.
2. Field welding of supports will occur during installation.
C. Hardware:
1. All necessary anchor bolts, gaskets, and fastening hardware for mounting and connecting
of the in -basin equipment to be supplied by plant manufacturer shall be included.
2. All anchor bolts and connecting hardware will be 304 stainless steel.
D. Process Control Panel:
One (1) pre-programmed process control panel capable of directing operation of all process
functions will be provided and will contain the following features and functions:
1. NEMA 12 enclosure
2. PLC
3. Color touchscreen HMI
4. Control / Monitoring for all equipment listed above in this proposal
5. UO Modules
6. HOA Switches
7. Indicating Lights
8. Remote Access Modem
9. Flow Proportional Control Software
3.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
3.8 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting attachment details.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
3. Detail fabrication and assembly of treatment plant components.
4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames
for equipment mounting.
5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 460753 Page 7 of 9

SECTION 460753 -PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
3.9 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Material test reports.
C. Product test reports.
D. Research reports.
E. Source quality -control reports.
F. Field quality -control reports.
G. Sample warranty.
3.10 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
C. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
3.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 for testing indicated and
accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC
Standard 17025.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/Dl.1M,
"Structural Welding Code — Steel."
F. Pipe and Pressure -Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according
to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
N::G01
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 460753 Page 8 of 9

SECTION 460753 -PACKAGED WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of the treatment
plant that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 1 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include
software support for two years.
B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and
program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial
Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for
using software.
1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the system and
to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
EAw�� a191a0-30aMi/[o0!
A. Once installation of the SBR System with tanks is complete, a service technician shall check the
installed equipment prior to equipment startup and provide instruction to the wastewater
treatment plant's personnel. This service will be performed over a total of six (6) trips and
eighteen (18) days on site.
END OF SECTION 460753
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 460753 Page 9 of 9

SECTION 46500001 -WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - FILTER
SECTION 465000.01 - WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - FILTER
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the Owner supplied Fluidyne Model F160424 FFP cloth media filter (2
required).
B. System Description: Furnish all labor, materials, and appurtenances required to provide a
tertiary filtering system. To be complete and operational with all control equipment and
accessories as shown and specified. The owner will provide (2) cloth media disk filters without
additional accessories to be installed by Contractor.
C. Each of the proposed Fluidyne Filter Systems will be complete and will include the following:
1. One (1) FFPTM Model F160424 Fixed Plate Cloth Media Filter(s) in stainless steel
tankage, each containing four (4) vertically placed cloth filtering element(s) providing a
total filtration area of 96 sqft per filter. Equipment and controls for each filter described
herein are offered as a complete package to ensure coordination and compatibility.
2. Filter Tankage & Elements, Each filter:
a. 304 S.S. tankage, including influent (8"), effluent (8"), backwash (8"), & overflow
(8") flanged connections.
b. Four (4) F160024 Cloth Media Filtering elements w/ 304 SS frame, mounting
channels, hold down clamps, and neoprene gasket. Media support elements are
easily removable from tankage for periodic inspection or media replacement. Each
media element contains two (2) cloth media panels that are removable from the
media support element during maintenance.
C. -One (1) FFPTM Tankage Cover, 304SS, to protect the filter's main clean water bay
from debris and algae growth on the filtering elements in direct sunlight. Cover is
removable for element inspection & during periodic element removal.
3. Valves, each installed Element:
a. One (1) 4" influent butterfly valve with pneumatically operated open -close
actuator.
b. -One (1) 6" backwash butterfly valve with pneumatically operated open / close
actuator.
C. One (1) V air valve solenoid for pressurized air release during backwash.
d. All valves shall be factory mounted to tankage and wired to tank mounted junction
box.
e. Pneumatic airline(s) shall be included from each valve to a common connection
point at the tank mounted air scour manifold.
4. Air Scour System & controls:
a. One (1) Air Scour Distribution Manifold, factory mounted to each filter at effluent
end, including pressure gauge, pressure control switch, and interconnecting piping.
b. Two (2) level probes per filter, factory mounted in the influent channel and near
effluent weir, factory wired to tank mounted control panel or junction box.
C. One (1) electrical main control panel, NEMA 4X, Fiberglass, factory mounted to
influent end of filter. Includes PLC, touch -screen operator interface, and terminal
strips for interconnection to filter mounted components and incoming power (by
others).
5. Manual Hoist:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500001 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 46500001 -WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - FILTER
a. One (1) Portable manual hoist for removal of filter elements, 304 SS frame w/
painted steel brake winch, galvanized steel cable, and zinc coated'/2 ton hook.
Sockets for hoist placement are integral to the FFPTM tankage.
b. Hoist is approximately 65 lbs and has a lifting capacity of 250 lbs. The hoist is not
intended to lift anything other than FFPTM filters elements, including humans,
equipment, pumps, etc.
C. Hoist is intended to be kept indoors when not in use. 100% 304SS hoist w/304SS
winch, cable, & hook is available as an option.
6. Surface Preparation & Painting
a. -Filter tankage, piping, and internal fabricated components of each filter are
stainless steel and shall not require shop priming, painting, or other coverage.
Equipment manufactured by others, including valves and control equipment, may
be brass, fiberglass, rubber, plastic, or painted carbon steel as part of their supply
to FC. No additional shop priming, painting, or coatings will be applied.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Based on the requirements, each filter system will be designed as follows:
Permitted Daily Flow:
360,000
gpd 250 gpm
Peak Daily Flow:
900,000
gpd 625 gpm
Total filter area available:
96
sq ft
Filter Area flow rate (ADF):
2.60
gpm/sf
Filter Area flow rate (PDF):
6.51
gpm/sf
Influent to Filters
30
mg/L TSS
Effluent from Filters
< 5 mg/L,
2 NTU (Title 22)
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500001 Page 2 of 2

SECTION 46500002 -WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - UV DISINFECTION
SECTION 465000.02 - WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - UV DISINFECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope:
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appurtenances required to provide an open channel
gravity flow ultraviolet (UV) disinfection system. To be complete and operation -al with all
control equipment and accessories as shown and specified.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 sf - Cast -In -Place Concrete.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre -qualification Requirements: Any alternate UV manufacturer that is not named or listed as
approved equal must submit the following 15 days prior to bid to be considered for approval:
1. To be considered, the manufacturer will be regularly engaged in the manufacture of UV
systems with a proven track record of at least one thousand (1,000) municipal
installations in North America.
2. The manufacturer will provide documentation of previous experience with municipal UV
disinfection systems in wastewater applications with electronic ballasts.
3. Pre -qualification submittals from manufacturers will include a complete and detailed
proposal of equipment offered, including the number of lamps proposed and a detailed
description of any exceptions taken to the specification.
4. To be considered, the manufacturer will submit a bioassay evaluation for the proposed
reactor. This bioassay will have been validated by an independent third party and have
followed protocols described in the US EPA Design Manual — Municipal Wastewater
Disinfection (EPA/625/1-86/021), without exception. The manufacturer's bioassay report
must demonstrate that the proposed UV system design and number of lamps will deliver
the specified dose.
5. Documentation of UV manufacturer's service capabilities including location and
experience.
6. Sample disinfection performance guarantee including scope and duration of guarantee -
minimum of 5 years required.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500002 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 46500002 -WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - UV DISINFECTION
7. All UV manufacturers will be required to pre -qualify, unless the manufacturer is the base
bid manufacturer.
B. Design Criteria
Provide equipment which will disinfect an effluent with the following characteristics:
a. Peak Flow: 900,000 Gpd
b. Total Suspended Solids: 30 mg/L on a 30 day average
C. Ultraviolet Transmittance @ 253.7 nm: 65%
d. Annual Effluent Temperature Range: 33 to 85 °F or 0 to 29 °C
e. Effluent standard to be guaranteed: 200 FC / 100 mL based on 30 day
Geometric Mean of consecutive daily grab samples
2. The UV equipment will be installed in a stainless steel channel furnished as part of this
system, and having dimensions as shown on the drawings.
3. The system supplied will be arranged in the following manner.
a. Number of Lamps in each UV Lamp Module: 4
b. Number of UV Lamp Modules: 10
4. The lamp array configuration will be evenly spaced in both horizontal and vertical rows
with all lamps parallel to each other and to the effluent flow.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. The UV system will be designed to deliver a minimum UV dose of 30,000 µWs/cm2, in
effluent with a UV Transmission of 70% after reductions for quartz sleeve absorption,
sleeve fouling, and lamp aging. The basis for evaluating the UV dose delivered by the
UV system will be the manufacturer's bioassay as carried out by an independent third
party. Bioassay validation methodology to follow protocols described in US EPA Design
Manual - Municipal Wastewater Disinfection (EPA/625/1-86/021), without exception.
2. The UV system will produce an effluent conforming to the following discharge permit:
200 FC/100 ml, based on a 30 day Geometric Mean. Grab samples will be taken in
accordance with the Microbiology Sampling Techniques found in Standard Methods for
the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 19th Ed.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
Submit for review shop drawings showing the following:
1. Complete description in sufficient detail to permit an item comparison with the
specification.
2. Dimensions and installation requirements.
3. Descriptive information including catalog cuts and manufacturers specifications for
components.
4. Electrical schematics and layouts.
5. Independent bioassay report demonstrating dose delivered under design conditions.
6. Experience documentation.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500002 Page 2 of 6

SECTION 46500002 -WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - UV DISINFECTION
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. Equipment:
The equipment furnished under this section will be free of defects in material and workmanship,
including damages that may be incurred during shipping for a period of 12 months from date of
substantial completion or 18 months after shipment, whichever comes first.
B. UV Lamps:
The UV lamps to be warranted for a minimum of 12,000 hours (non -prorated) or thirty-six (36)
calendar months from shipment, whichever comes first. Pro -rated lamp warranties will not be
accepted. On / off cycles are limited to an average of four (4) per day without exception.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Trojan Technologies, of London, Ontario, Canada. If other equipment is proposed, the
Contractor must demonstrate to the Engineer and the Owner that all requirements of materials,
validation, experience, performance, and workmanship have been met or exceeded by the
equipment proposed. Contractors proposing alternate manufacturers will be responsible for all
costs associated with system evaluation and redesign including all electrical, mechanical and
civil aspects of the installation.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide a UV disinfection system complete with UV lamp modules, effluent channel (if
stainless steel), level control, and UV monitoring system as shown on the Contract Drawings
and as herein specified.
B. UV system will be designed for complete outdoor installation, without shelter or supplemental
cooling or heating required.
2.3 DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS
A. General:
1. All material in contact with effluent will be stainless steel or quartz.
2. All material exposed to UV light will be stainless steel, anodized aluminum, quartz 214,
or TeflonTM.
B. UV Module (UVM):
1. Each UV lamp module will consist of 4 lamps and their corresponding electronic ballast.
Each lamp will be enclosed in its individual quartz sleeve, one end of which will be
closed and the other end sealed by a lamp end seal and holder.
2. The electrical wires connecting the lamps to the electronic ballasts will be enclosed in the
stainless steel frame. Systems where lamp wiring is submerged in the effluent and
exposed to UV light will not be allowed.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500002 Page 3 of 6

SECTION 46500002 -WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - UV DISINFECTION
3. Each UV module will be provided with a standard 120 Volt plug and weatherproof cable
for connection to a receptacle. The cable will be 10 feet (3.0 m) long. A total of 2 UV
modules will be supplied. Lamp status will be displayed on top of each UV module
using watertight LED indicator lights.
4. Modules will be approximately 68.2 inches long, 14.16 inches high and 2.26 inches wide,
weighing approximately 30 lbs. Materials of construction will be stainless steel type 316,
anodized aluminum, quartz 214, and Teflonrm, with UL rating of Type 6P
C. UV Lamps:
1. UV system will use low pressure mercury slimline lamps of the hot cathode, instant start
design.
2. 90% of UV output will be within the wavelengths of 233.7 to 273.7 nm.
3. The operating life of the lamp will be guaranteed for 12,000 hours, non pro -rated.
4. Independent validation of lamps aging factor is required.
D. Lamp End Seal and Lamp Holder:
1. The open end of the lamp sleeve will be sealed by means of a sleeve nut which threads
onto a sleeve cup and compresses the sleeve `O' ring.
2. The sleeve nut will have a knurled surface to allow a positive handgrip for tightening.
The sleeve nut will not require any tools for removal.
E. UV Lamp Sleeves:
1. Quartz sleeves to be Type 214 clear fused quartz circular tubing as manufactured by
General Electric or equal.
2. Quartz to be rated for UV transmission of 89% and not subject to solarization.
3. The nominal wall thickness will be 1.0 to 2.0 mm to maximize UV transmission.
F. Effluent Channel:
Each UV unit will be provided with one (1) stainless steel effluent channel complete with
drain, UV module support rack and downstream level control weir.
G. Level Control Weir:
1. Weir will be located downstream of the UV modules to maintain an average water depth
of 6 inches and ensure lamp submergence at all times.
2. Maximum effluent level variance from zero to peak flow will not exceed 1.5 inches (3.8
cm).
3. Weir will be welded water tight and include a drain.
H. Electrical:
1. The UV disinfection system will be divided into 10 UV modules.
2. Interconnecting Cables to be standard 120 Volt, weatherproof, 10 feet long and will be
suitable for outdoor installation.
Power Distribution Receptacles:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500002 Page 4 of 6

SECTION 46500002 -WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - UV DISINFECTION
a. 2- 120 Volt receptacle rated for continuous outdoor use will be provided.
Receptacle will be of the duplex type complete with ground fault interrupter
circuitry.
b. Receptacles to be provided by the UV Manufacturer.
4. Power Consumption:
a. Maximum power draw to UV System will be 3,500 watts, 31.7 amps (lamps only).
b. All electrical supplies will be 120 Volt, 60 Hz.
C. A separate 120 volt, 5 amp supply to be provided for the Monitoring System.
I. Cleaning Procedure:
The UV lamp modules will be cleaned by removing from the effluent channel and hand wiping
the sleeves with an acid solution, using a non-abrasive cloth.
Monitoring System:
1. 1 submersible UV sensor(s) will continuously monitor the W intensity produced in the
bank of UV lamp modules. The sensor will measure the germicidal portion of the light
emitted by the UV lamps.
2. UV intensity will be indicated on a 3 character display in mW/cm2.
3. Elapsed time in hours (lamp age) will be indicated on a 5 character display.
4. Both displays will utilize LEDs and will be visible through the panel door.
5. A dry contact will be provided for remote indication of Low UV intensity alarm.
6. Monitoring System will be enclosed in a fiberglass Type 4X wall mounted panel and is to
be located less than twelve (12) feet (3.66 m) from the LED end of the UV Module.
K. Power Distribution Receptacle (PDR):
1. 1. Duplex ground fault interrupter receptacle(s) will be provided by the UV
Manufacturer.
2. 2. Receptacles will be mounted in an individual, impact resistant thermoplastic junction
box complete with a Type 3R rain shield for outdoor installation.
Contractor to supply appropriate 120 Volt, single phase, 60 Hz circuit to power the PDRs
which have a total current draw of approximately 3.2 amps. Contractor to be responsible for
distributing the power from the main 120 Volt feed to the individual PDRs. Responsibility to be
all encompassing and in accordance with the local electrical codes.
L. Transition Connections
1. Inlet and I outlet transition boxes will be supplied.
2. The material of construction for the transition boxes will be stainless steel type 304, 14
gauge.
Openings on the transition boxes (for flange connections) conform to ANSI standards and
have dimensions as shown on the Contract Drawings.
M. Maintenance Rack:
1. Type 304 stainless steel maintenance rack(s) will be supplied. The rack is designed to
hold UV modules during service or maintenance.
N. Spare Parts:
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500002 Page 5 of 6

SECTION 46500002 -WASTEWATER TERTIARY TREATMENT - UV DISINFECTION
The following additional parts will be furnished:
1 -Complete Spare Module
1 -Operator's Kit
3 -O&M Manuals
[7:� 71rc��fii��[�]►1
3.1 INSTALLATION
In accordance with shop drawings, and Manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S SERVICES
As specified.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500002 Page 6 of 6

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
SECTION 465000.03 - VERTICAL FINE SCREEN WITH VERTICAL SCREW CONVEYOR AND
SCREENINGS COMPACTOR
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Contractor shall furnish, install and place into satisfactory operating condition Vertical
Fine Screen for removing floating, particulate and fibrous material and for vertical
conveying, dewatering and compacting the screenings and for discharging the
compacted screenings into bags; as shown on the Drawings and described in the
Specifications.
B. It is the intent of these Specifications that all equipment called for under this Section shall
be supplied by a single manufacturer.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
1. Section A322: Carbon and Alloy Steel Bar Specifications.
2. Section A507-10: Standard Specification for Drawing Alloy Steel, Sheet and Strip,
Hot- Rolled and Cold Rolled
B. Anti -Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) Publications:
1. Standard 9-90 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. Standard 11-90 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Publications
D. American Welding Society (AWS) Publications
E. American Structures Painting Council (ASPC) Publications
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with
Section 01300. Copies of all materials are required to establish compliance with this
Section. Submittals shall include the following:
B. Product Data shall include the following:
1. Descriptive literature, brochures, catalogs, cut -sheets and other detailed
descriptive material of the equipment.
2. Motor characteristics and performance information.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 1 of 11

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
3. Gear reducer data including service factor, efficiency, torque rating, and materials.
4. Parts list including a list of recommended spare parts.
C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Manufacturer's installation drawings.
2. Wiring and schematic diagrams.
D. Operations and maintenance manual: See Section 01300.
E. Equipment weights and lifting points.
F. Recommendations for short and long term storage.
G. A copy of the manufacturer's warranty
H. Failure to include all drawings applicable to the equipment specified in this section will
result in rejection of the entire submittal with no further review.
I. A copy of documents proving certification of the Manufacturer's Quality Management
System according to ISO 9001 and Environmental Protection Management System
according to ISO 14001.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. To ensure quality, conformance, and reliability with regard to the manufacturing and
production of the equipment, the manufacturer shall meet all requirements listed hereafter:
B. The Contract Documents represent the minimum acceptable standards for the screening
equipment for this project. All equipment shall conform fully in every respect to the
requirements of the respective parts and sections of the drawings and specifications. The
entire unit shall be Manufacturer's standard product, but shall be modified,
redesigned, furnished with special features or accessories, made of materials or provided
with finishes as may be necessary to conform to the quality mandated by the technical
and performance requirements of the specification.
C. The unit shall be manufactured from stainless steel shapes and shall be passivated by full
submergence in a pickling bath for perfect surface finishing. No stainless steel
components may be fabricated or assembled in a factory where carbon steel products are
also fabricated, in order to prevent contamination by rust.
D. All stainless steel parts of the unit shall be fully submerged into a pickling bath for at least
10 hours to remove welding spots and to protect the stainless steel against corrosion.
Sprayed or brushed passivation, glass bead or sand blasted, or otherwise treated stainless
steel shall not be allowed.
E. Electric motors, gear reducers, and other self-contained or enclosed components shall have
an acrylic enamel finish.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 2 of 11

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
F. Fabrication shall be done in compliance with all applicable ASTM standards or
equivalent international standards.
G. All welding is performed in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1
Structural Welding Code, or equivalent. All welding in the factory shall use shielded arc,
inert gas, MIG or TIG method. Filler wire shall be added to all welds to provide for a
cross section equal to or greater than the parent metal. Butt welds shall fully penetrate
to the interior surface and gas shielding to interior and exterior of the joint shall be
provided.
H. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be selected from AISI 304 or 316 Stainless Steel such that
they are anti -seizing.
Manufacturer shall have established an ISO 9001 certified quality management system.
J. Manufacturer shall have established an ISO 14001 certified environmental protection
management system.
K. Manufacturer shall provide screen, screw, motor, gear reducer, controls, control panels, and
lifting attachments as a complete integrated package to ensure proper coordination,
compatibility, and operation of the system. The manufacturer shall test -run the fully
assembled machine in his factory before shipment.
L. Manufacturer shall provide services by a factory -trained Service Engineer, specifically
trained on the type of equipment specified. The Service Engineer requirements include,
but are not limited to the following:
1. The Service Engineer shall be present during initial energizing of equipment to
determine directional testing as described in Section 4.01 C (Installation).
2. The Service Engineer shall inspect and verify location of anchor bolts,
placement, leveling, alignment and field erection of equipment, as well as control
panel operation and electrical connections.
3. The Service Engineer shall provide classroom and/or field training on the
Operation and Maintenance of the equipment to operator personnel. These
instructions may include the use of slides, videos, literature, and/or oral
presentations.
4. Manufacturer shall state field service rates for a Service Engineer to Owner
and Contractor. In the event that the field service time required by this section
should not be sufficient to properly place the equipment into operation, and the
requirement for additional time is beyond the manufacturer's responsibility,
additional time shall be purchased by Contractor to correct deficiencies in
installation, equipment, or material without additional cost to Owner.
M. All Equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least 10 years of
experience manufacturing this product and 30 installations in the United States and
over 400 installations worldwide of the type being proposed. A list of installations
shall be furnished upon request.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 3 of 11

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
1.5 ENGINEER'S PRE -APPROVAL OF ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT
Manufacturer of alternate equipment shall submit a pre -approval package to Engineer at least two
(2) weeks prior to bid date. Alternate manufacturer shall submit the following information
and supporting documentation:
A. A complete set of drawings, specifications, catalog cut -sheets, and detailed
descriptive material. Drawings shall show all relevant details of the unit. This
information shall identify all technical and performance requirements stipulated on the
drawings and in the specification. If the proposed equipment does not meet these
specifications, any deviation from the specification must be expressly noted. All
deviations shall be listed on a single document.
B. Detailed installation drawings illustrating how the proposed screen fits in the
allocated space and how it shall be installed. The drawings shall include plan,
elevation, and sectional views of the installation. Drawings shall include details of the
seal between the screen and the inlet pipe, and details of the anchor bolt locations.
C. Motor characteristics and performance information. Vendor data shall be furnished to
confirm the torque and thrust rating of the drive.
D. Complete reference list of all installations of same and similar equipment including contact
names and phone numbers, showing at least 20 installations of the same type and size as
specified that have been in operation for a minimum of 5 years.
E. Complete bill of materials for all equipment, showing dimensions and materials of
construction of all components.
F. Certification by the manufacturer that all stainless steel equipment will be manufactured in
a stainless steel only factory.
G. Certification that the entire equipment will be passivated by submersion in an acid bath as
specified in chapter 1.04 and described in A.3.
H. A copy of documents proving certification of the Manufacturer's Quality Management
System according to ISO 9001 and Environmental Protection Management System
according to ISO 14001.
I. Details of the control and instrumentation system including wiring diagrams.
J. Information on equipment field erection requirements including total weight of assembled
components and weight of each sub -assembly.
K. List of recommended spare parts.
L. A maintenance schedule showing the required maintenance, frequency of maintenance,
lubricants and other items required at each regular preventative maintenance period,
including all buy-out items.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 4 of 11

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Base Bid: Rotamat RoK 4 Vertical Screen 300 from Huber Technology, Inc.
2. Pre -submitted and pre -approved Deductive Alternates
Named and unnamed manufactures have to comply fully with these specifications and the
drawings. Being a named manufacturer in no way assumes automatic compliance with the
specification and that the product will be acceptable. All changes required to the drawings to
facilitate alternate equipment will be borne by the manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Screen Design Summary
1. Number of Screens
one
2. Perforation Diameter, inch
3mm (1/8")
3. Nominal Screen Basket Diameter, mm
300mm (12")
4. Auger Tube Diameter, inch
10.75
5. Average Flow per screen, MGD
6. Max. Flow per screen, MGD
0.90 MGD)
7. Wet screenings capacity, cfph
2 I/min (4.23 cu.ft/hr)
8. Inflow Connection Flange Diameter, inch
8
B. The screen shall be designed to withstand maximum forces exerted during operation. All
structural and functional members shall be sized to prevent deflection or vibration which
could impair operation.
C. The average perforation flow through velocity shall not exceed 3.3 ft/sec (1.0 m/sec) under
any flow condition up to the maximum clean water flow specified above.
D. The screen shall be capable of processing spherical objects with a diameter of 3-1/8". Such
objects shall be conveyed through the auger and shall be discharged with the screenings. The
unit shall be capable of processing the screenings load specified above.
E. The fine screen shall have a cylindrical screen basket made of perforated plate, and an integral
screw conveyor and screenings press. The screw in the basket shall be provided with a brush
on its flight for screen cleaning. The screen shall use a single drive for screening,
conveying, dewatering and compressing the screened material. The axis of the fine screen shall
be vertical.
F. Operation of the screen drive shall be automatically initiated at a preset high upstream
liquid level. Screens which operate continuously or via timer only will not be acceptable.
The screw shall remove solids from the screenings basket. The screenings shall be moved up
by the screw conveyor and through a compaction zone and shall be discharged into bags.
G. All perforations of the screen basket shall be cleaned with a brush on the screw flights.
H. The screening equipment shall produce dewatered screenings capable of passing the EPA Paint
Filter Test as described in method 9095 of EPA Publication SW -486.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 5 of 11

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
I. To minimize odors and nuisance, the conveyance, dewatering and compaction zones shall be
completely enclosed.
J. The control system shall be designed such that the cleaning characteristics of the screen can be
changed via the programmable controller. Systems which do not offer this feature will not
be acceptable for this project.
2.3 PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
A. MATERIALS
1. Unless otherwise specified in these specifications, the entire equipment shall
be manufactured from AISI 304L austenitic stainless steel shapes (rods, angles,
and channels), pipes, and sheets. All mechanical parts shall be designed to
handle the forces that may be exerted on the unit during fabrication, shipping,
erection, and proper operation according to the O&M manual.
2. The entire equipment shall be manufactured in a stainless steel only factory
to prevent contamination of the stainless steel with rusty dust.
3. The equipment, after its fabrication, shall undergo a passivation (pickling) process
to ensure maximum resistance to corrosion. All stainless steel components and
structures shall be submersed in a chemical bath of nitric acid and hydrofluoric
acid to remove any residues that may be present on the material as a result of
forming, manufacture, or handling. After removal from the pickling bath, the
equipment must be washed with a high-pressure wash of cold water to remove any
remaining surface debris and promote the formation of an oxidized passive layer
which is critical to the long life of the stainless steel.
4. The brush shall be made of Nylon and shall be provided with a stainless steel clamp.
I— MITON M
1. The screen shall be designed and built to withstand all static and hydraulic forces
exerted by the liquid to the screen. All structural and functional parts shall be sized
for the loads encountered during screening, conveying and pressing operations.
2. The screen shall have a circular body, a 24" tall circular screen basket with square
inlet box and emergency overflow, and a bottom plate. Designs where the flow
enters directly into the side of basket without the use of an inlet box are explicitly not
acceptable.
3. The circular screen basket shall be attached to the circular screen body via a 0.16"
flange with six (6) bolts and nuts, permitting easy removal of the screen basket.
4. The bottom of the screen body shall be welded to an inflow box. The upper end of
the inflow box shall be open and serve as an emergency by-pass overflow. The
inflow box shall be provided with a flanged inflow connection. The invert of the
inflow connection into the inflow box shall have a height of 12" above the screen's
bottom plate to prevent flow backing into the inlet pipe and causing increased
machine run- time. Screens with a pipe inlet which do not incorporate an inflow box
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 6 of 11

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
with overflow will not be acceptable.
5. Manufacturer shall provide a height -adjustable support leg supporting the bottom
plate of the screen from the floor or from a support beam that is to be provided and
installed by contractor according to the drawings. The screen shall also be supported
laterally by sets of dual supports running the length of the machine at intervals as
indicated in the manufacturer's drawings.
C. SCREENINGS CONVEYOR AND SCREENINGS COMPACTOR
The screen shall be cleaned with a stainless steel screw with helicoid -shaped flights
designed for vertical transport of screenings. The flights of the screw in the basket
shall be provided with a 1/4 inch thick hardened stainless steel strip having the same
width as the flights of the screw. The strip shall be welded to the face of the flight,
on both sides, over the full length of the screen basket. The flights of the screw
shall be machined to match the screen basket such that the face of the strip is
parallel to the screen basket's inner surface.
2. A stainless steel backed nylon brush shall be attached to the screw flight over the
entire length of the screen basket. The brush shall be attached by means of holding
clips and fasteners made of stainless steel.
The screenings screw conveyor shall be 10.75" with a minimum wall thickness of
0.1". Four (4) anti -rotation bars shall be welded to the inside of the transport tube
along its longitudinal axis. The screenings screw conveyor shall not be in contact
with the anti -rotation bars during normal operation. Designs which do not
incorporate a minimum of four (4) anti -rotation bars are not acceptable.
4. A flange shall be welded to the conical transition piece to support the screen basket. A
gear box support flange shall be welded to the upper end of the auger tube for
support of the drive assembly.
5. A shafted stainless steel screw with helical flight shall be installed in the auger tube
for conveying and compaction of the screened material. The auger shaft shall have a
diameter of 3.4" with a shaft wall thickness of 0.2". Designs utilizing shaft -less
screws and/or carbon steel screws in the auger shall not be acceptable.
6. The discharge section of the auger shall be provided with a reverse flight with
cutting blade welded on for added strength to actively cut through the screenings
plug and positively discharge material without blockage.
7. The upper end of the screw conveyor shaft shall be fitted with a solid stub having a
diameter of 2.4". The stub and the screw conveyor shaft shall be accurately machined
and shrink -fitted with each other.
8. After all flanges are welded to the auger tube, the faces of the flanges shall be
machined on a lathe such that they are exactly perpendicular to the tube axis.
9. A compaction zone shall be provided as an integral part of the screw conveyor and
tube. The compaction zone shall be designed to form a plug of screenings material
and to return water released from the screened material through 13/64" (5 mm)
diameter perforations that are machined into the screenings transport tube in a
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 7 of 11

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
square configuration.
10. The compaction zone shall be provided with split glass fiber reinforced housing,
furnished with gaskets and bolts, and easily removable for access. Designs
requiring removal of the drive assembly, discharge head, or screw conveyor to gain
access to the compaction zone will not be acceptable. The housing shall be provided
with a drain connection at its lowest point and a clamped flexible PVC hose for drain
water. The plastic housing shall also be provided with a 1" flush connection for
connection to a 31 gpm plant water supply rated at 60psi.
11. The upper end of the auger tube shall be provided with a discharge chute for the
screenings. The chute shall be 10.75" in width to match the width of the screen
rising tube, have a 40 degree slope, and be provided with a bagging adaptor
suitable for mounting 295ft endless screenings bags. The chute shall be provided
with a removable cover to allow operator access in the event of blockage in the
discharge zone.
12. The auger tube shall be provided with lifting lugs for connection of lifting gear,
permitting installation and removal of the entire screen.
D. GEAR MOTOR DRIVE
1. The screw shall be driven by a shaft mounted geared motor with an output speed of
approximately 91pm. The geared motor shall have a minimum service factor of 1.0
equivalent to an AGMA Class I rating.
2. The gear reducer shall be bolted to a machined flange welded to the upper end of
the auger tube.
3. The gear reducer shall be driven by a 1,800 rpm, 3-phase, 60 Hertz, 230/460 volt,
Class 1 Division 2, continuous -duty motor with leads to a conduit box for outdoor
operation. Motor power shall be 1.Ohp.
eT414 .1
1. The discharge chute shall be furnished with a bagging device to contain and encase
dewatered screenings. The bagging device shall use endless bags.
2. The bagging device shall be fabricated of minimum 12 gauge (2.5 mm) stainless
steel.
3. The screenings bagger shall be designed to be fitted with 295ft of replaceable plastic
bags.
F. ANCHOR BOLTS
1. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish all anchor bolts of ample size and strength
required to securely anchor each item of equipment. Anchor bolts, hex nuts, and
washers shall be stainless steel. Anchor bolts shall be wedge or epoxy type.
2. Anchor bolts shall be set by the contractor. Equipment shall be placed on the
foundations, leveled, shimmed, bolted down, and grouted with a non -shrinking grout.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 8 of 11

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
G. OUTDOOR WEATHER PROTECTION (OPTIONAL)
1. The screenings transport tube shall be furnished with thermal insulation made of
mineral wool, with stainless steel protective cover, and with a heat tracing system for
outdoor weather protection which shall enclose the screenings transport tube,
compaction and dewatering zone and all spray wash piping, ball valves and solenoid
valves.
2. The outdoor weather protection system shall include self-regulating heat tracing,
adjustable thermostat, insulation and a stainless steel protective jacket.
3. The heat tracing system shall be suitable for operation down to a minimum
temperature of -25 deg C (43 deg F) and shall be powered from the main control
panel.
4. All components requiring service or maintenance shall be easily accessible.
H. CONTROL SYSTEM
1. All controls necessary for the fully automatic operation of the screen shall be
provided.
2. The electrical control system shall provide for automatic control of the screen via PLC
control and a high liquid level using an inlet box mounted pressure sensor in
combination with an adjustable timer.
3. Control panel shall be suitable for outdoor, wall -mounting. Enclosure shall be NEMA
4X stainless steel with continuous hinge and lockable door latch, and shall include
the following:
A. Door -interlocked and fused disconnect
B. 600 VAC terminal block
C. NEMA reversing motor starter and Circuit Breaker Branch Circuit Protection for
screen motor
D. PLC will be Allen Bradley Micrologix 1400
E. Operator interface will be a Allen Bradley PanelView C400
F. Panel heater with thermostat (OPTION)
G. Control power transformer with 120 VAC transient voltage surge compressor
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 9 of 11

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
(TVSC) and fused primary and secondary
H. Hand -Off -Auto selector switches for the following
I. Screen drive
J. Screen forward -off -reverse
K. Pilot lights for
a) Control power on (white)
b) Screen running (green)
c) Screen high level (amber)
d) Screen fault (red)
L. E -stop push button (red)
M. Screen reset push button (black)
N. Door mounted elapsed time meters for screen drive
O. Digital inputs for the following high water level
P. Remote dry contact outputs for screen running
Q. Flashing alarm light and alarm horn with silencer -reset button
R. Plastic Nameplates
PART 3: SPARE PARTS
The following Spare Parts shall be included and supplied together with the equipment:
a) 2 cleaning brushes
b) 5 Boxes with 295 ft endless bags each
PART 4: EXECUTION
4.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT
A. All equipment shall be shipped and delivered fully assembled, except where partial
disassembly is required in order to conform to transportation regulations or for the
protection of components.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for unloading of the machinery and shall have equipment
on-site available at the time of delivery permitting proper hoisting of the equipment.
4.2 FIELD PREPARATION AND PAINTING
A. Contractor shall touch-up all shipping damage to the paint and stainless steel as soon as
the equipment arrives on the job site.
B. Contractor shall supply paint for field touch-up and field painting.
C. Contractor shall finish paint electrical motors, speed reducers, and other self-contained or
enclosed components with oil -resistance enamel.
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 10 of 11

SECTION 46500003 -VERTICAL FINE SCREEN
D. Contractor shall coat all stainless steel bolts and nut threads with a non -seizing
compound prior to final assembly.
4.3 INSTALLATION, START-UP AND OPERATOR TRAINING
A. Contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field to ensure compliance of equipment
dimensions with the drawings. Contractor shall notify Engineer of significant deviations.
B. Installation of the equipment shall be in strict accordance with the contract documents
and the manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. Manufacturer shall supply anchor
bolts for the equipment. Contractors shall install the anchor bolts in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations
C. Manufacturer shall furnish the services of a factory -trained and employed service
engineer for one (1) trip including two (2) days to inspect the installation, start-up the
screening equipment, and provide operator training.
1. Equipment shall not be energized, or "bumped" to check the electrical connection for
motor rotation without the Service Engineer present.
2. The Service Engineer shall make all necessary adjustments and settings to the
controls. In particular, Service Engineer shall verify the measurement relay setting
and the initial water level setting for the screen.
3. The Service Engineer shall demonstrate proper operation of screen. The screen
shall operate automatically based on the water level.
END OF SECTION 465000.03
LDI PN 1014381 SECTION 46500003 Page 11 of 11